Crabtree Wiring Accessories Circuit Protection Catalogue (1) 5v5835

2004 wiring accessories circuit protection

Acknowledged as one of Britain‘s leading manufacturers of wiring accessories and circuit protection equipment. Crabtree‘s diverse product range is renowned for its outstanding quality and excellent value for money. Specified worldwide, Crabtree products are designed to satisfy the needs of specifiers, wholesalers, contractors and end-s in domestic, commercial and industrial markets alike.

Crabtree’s reputation for pioneering new concepts in the electrical industry – right from the acclaimed Lincoln Switch in 1919 to the launch of the latest innovation in wiring accessories - Platinum a brand new low profile & flat plate wiring accessories range, maintaining our position at the forefront of manufacturing technology. It is this insight into our customers’ needs, together with the technical expertise to turn innovative ideas into top quality products that has made Crabtree a market leader.

Every Crabtree product is rigorously tested before being despatched to the customer. This excellence is reinforced by the company’s registration of compliance with ISO 9001: 2000 which ensures that these procedures are maintained at the highest level. Crabtree’s product ranges are developed with flexibility in mind, and with the evolution of more modular ranges, customers can be confident of obtaining the right product for each application. The same attention to detail can be seen in the company‘s commitment to customer service. With up-to-the minute technology at the heart of its management information systems, the company is able to manufacture and despatch in the shortest possible time, whilst a communications network in its Central Sales Office ensures that customer enquiries are dealt with speedily and effectively. The company’s commitment does not end there. Specifying Crabtree products ensures not only a first class product, but also the benefit of a wide range of services. For example, comprehensive product and technical literature, a highly qualified sales force and extensive wholesaler training. Crabtree‘s Technical Services Department is able to offer expert advice on technical issues, and the preparation of individual quotes.

All Crabtree products comply with the applicable British Standard specification and should be installed by suitably qualified personnel in accordance with the requirements of relevant legislation, regulations (including IEE Wiring Regulations) and the accepted practice in the industry. For ease of product selection, the catalogue is divided into sections. Each has its own introduction and contains relevant product information.

C A P I TA L P O W E R & C O N T R O L

It is the practice of the Electrium Group of companies to protect new ideas by seeking patent protection, and to protect new designs by seeking ed design protection, and the products listed or described in this publication may in consequence be protected by one or more patents, and/or ed designs and/or applications. A full list of patents, ed designs and applications may be obtained from the Company Secretary of Electrium Limited.

2

C A P I TA L & M I N D E R L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L

12

P L AT I N U M L O W P R O F I L E & F L AT P L AT E

20

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E

30

C A P I TA L D E C O R AT I V E B R A S S

38

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM

44

C A P I TA L M E TA L C L A D

52

W E AT H E R S E A L WAT E R & D U S T P R O T E C T E D

56

C A P I TA L I N T E R I O R S & PA N E L M O U N T I N G

62

C A P I TA L I N S TA L L AT I O N B O X E S & S E R V I C E I T E M S

66

D ATA PA K D ATA , V O I C E & PAT C H PA N E L S

70

LSC LUMINAIRE COUPLERS

74

LDB LUMINAIRE DISTRIBUTION BOXES

76

WA RW I C K P V C T R U N K I N G

78

S TA R B R E A K E R D O M E S T I C C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

88

L I F E S TA R R C D

101

T E C H N I C A L D ATA

105

DIMENSIONS

122

NUMERICAL INDEX

133

POWER & CONTROL

Wide concave rockers are easy to operate.

Unique labyrinth switch design minimises visible arc flash and prevents front access to live parts. Positive drive switch action prevents balancing between the ‘on’ and ‘off’ position and gives reliable indication of the position.

2

American standard socket now available in horizontal format

Shutter mechanism is operated by earth pin of plug.

Two earth terminals are fitted as standard to the Single and Twin Socket.

consistent styling and inherent safety features across a broad range of applications. The range of socket outlets, fused connection units and switches is complemented by products which cater for specific applications such as cooker control units, shaver units, fan control switches and shower control switches. New Twin Switched Socket with outboard Rockers

C A P I TA L P O W E R & C O N T R O L

Capital power and control accessories are fully design co-ordinated to offer

3

13A SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS

4304/3

4306

l

BS 1363 1 gang SP with two earth terminals

PACK QTY 10

1 gang SP fitted with neon indicator

10

4304/3

1 gang DP with two earth terminals

10

4304/D

1 gang DP fitted with neon indicator

10

4304/3D

2 gang SP fitted with two earth terminals

5

4306

2 gang SP fitted with neon indicator

5

4306/3

2 gang DP fitted with two earth terminals

5

4306/D

2 gang DP fitted with neon indicator

5

4306/3D

2 gang DP outboard rockers twin earth

5

4307

2 gang DP outboard rockers with neon indicator

5

4307/3

Dimensions Mounting boxes

1 2 1 2

gang gang gang gang

4304

86mm x 86mm 146mm x 86mm 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 9048 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

Large capacity tunnel type terminals for easy wiring. Shallow back projection for ease of installation in a 25mm deep box. ● Two Earth terminals for use where compliance with section 607 (IEE wiring Regs.), high integrity earthing is necessary. ● ●

4307

13A UNSWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS BS 1363 1 gang unswitched 1 gang unswitched with two earth terminals 2 gang unswitched 2 gang unswitched with two earth terminals Dimensions Mounting boxes

7255

1 2 1 2

gang gang gang gang

BS 1363

10

4827

DP Switched with neon indicator

10

4827/3

Unswitched

10

4828

10

4828/3

Unswitched with neon indicator Dimensions Mounting boxes ●

● ● ●

●

C A P I TA L P O W E R

●

4

l

PACK QTY

DP Switched

4827/3

7255 7255/TE 7257 7257/TE

86mm x 86mm 146mm x 86mm 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 9048 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

13A FUSED CONNECTION UNITS

4828

l

PACK QTY 10 10 5 5

86mm x 86mm 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Fitted with knock-out position in bottom edge of plate for use with or without cord outlet. Suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter. Fused on the line side with a 13A fuse link. Fuse ASTA certified and marked to BS1362. For spare fuse links see page 6. With fuse removed, carrier may be padlocked for extra on site ‘maintenance’ safety. Suitable padlock see page 100. Shallow back projection for ease of installation in a 25mm deep box.

13A SAFETYSOCKET WITH RCD PROTECTION BS 7288

Double pole operation, 3mm gap.

Reset button gives a highly visible indication of device status.

4406/A03

l

PACK QTY

1 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4404/A01

1 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4404/A03

2 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4406/A01

2 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4406/A03

Dimensions Mounting boxes

146mm x 86mm 9048 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

See page 102 for further information. Can be installed to replace any 2 gang size socket outlet on 25mm deep box. All available with two earth terminals to enable installation to comply with section 607 (wiring regulations) Add suffix /TE to List No.

5A, 15A SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS BS 546 5A shuttered SP 15A shuttered SP Dimensions Mounting boxes

2330

2382

10

2330

10

2382

86mm x 86mm 2330 – 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 2382 – 9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

2A, 5A, 15A, 16A SOCKET OUTLETS BS 546 WHERE APPLICABLE

l

PACK QTY

2.5-16A 2 pin unswitched unshuttered

10

7044*

2A unswitched shuttered

10

7046

2A unswitched unshuttered

10

7046/E*

5A unswitched shuttered

10

7047

15A unswitched shuttered

10

7048

Dimensions Mounting boxes 7044

l

PACK QTY

7046/E

86mm x 86mm 7044, 7046, 7047–9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 7048–9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

* Export only

15A 125V AMERICAN STANDARD SOCKET OUTLETS l NEMA CONFIGURATION 5-15

10

7061

2 gang horizontal

5

7062

2 gang vertical

5

7062/E

Dimensions Mounting boxes

7062

PACK QTY

1 gang

1 gang 86mm x 86mm 2 gang 86mm x 146mm 1 gang 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 2 gang 9048 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

Push-in termination accepts 2.5mm2 cable. Screw-in termination accepts 4mm2 cable.

7062/E

BLANKING PLATES

l

BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE

20

4001

2 gang

20

4002

1 gang architrave

20

4003

2 gang architrave

20

4004

Dimensions 4001

4002

PACK QTY

1 gang

1 gang 86mm x 86mm, 2 gang 146mm x 86mm 1 gang architrave 33mm x 86mm 2 gang architrave 33mm x 146mm

C A P I TA L P O W E R

7061

5

3A, 13A FUSED SAFETY PLUGS BS 1363 ASTA MARKED

l

PACK QTY

Fused at 13A

10

7221

Fused at 3A

10

7221/3

Live and neutral pins have moulded nylon sleeves for safety. ASTA certified for complete compliance with BS 1363. ASTA approved by reference number 4. Fitted with ASTA certified fuse link marked BS 1362, List Nos.6920/3 and 6920/13, see below.

7221/3

7221 wired

13A FUSED RESILIENT PLUGS BS 1363/A

l

PACK QTY

Fused at 13A – white

10

7222/WH

Fused at 13A – black

10

7222/BK

Live and neutral pins have moulded nylon sleeves for safety. Cover in rubber material. Base in nylon. ASTA approved by reference number 20. Fitted with ASTA certified fuse-link marked to BS 1362, List No.6920/13, see below.

7222/WH

7222/BK

13A NON-INTERCHANGEABLE PLUGS

l

PACK QTY Fused at 13A – white

10

13NP

Fused at 13A – red

10

13NPRD

Only for use with Britmac non-standard sockets

13NP

2A, 5A, 15A PLUGS BS 546

l

PACK QTY

2A

10

7011

5A

10

7111

15A

10

7211

C A P I TA L P O W E R

Moulded from white thermoset plastic. Live and neutral pins have moulded nylon sleeves for safety. Round pin plugs are not fused.

6

7011

7111

7211

FUSE LINKS

l

PACK QTY

6920/3

6920/5

6920/13

6925

3A red

100

6920/3

5A black

100

6920/5*

13A brown

100

6920/13

Spare dimmer fuse

10

6925

Type tested to BS 1362 and ASTA certified, except List No.6925 which is type tested to BS 4265:1977 rated at 3.15 A 250V. * Price and delivery on application.

5A CARD SWITCH

l

PACK QTY 5A card switch Dimensions Mounting boxes

5

4018

86mm x 94mm 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Controls energy consumption in installations such as hotels by ensuring that appliances are not left on when rooms are unoccupied. The switch is operated by a door entry card and controls the supply to a room via a suitably rated or. Will accept door entry cards up to 86mm x 54mm x 1mm.

4018

6AX TP CONTROL SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1 BS EN 60947-3

5

4017

6AX three pole isolating switch marked with isolator and fan symbol

5

4017/1

Dimensions Mounting boxes

4017

4017/1

PACK QTY

6AX three pole isolating switch marked with isolator symbol

86mm x 86mm 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Provides local isolation of fans with or without timers whilst the rest of the circuit remains live. Enables repair or routine maintenance of fans. 240V only. For full details of compliance with BS EN 60947-3 see Technical Data page 107.

20A DP CONTROL SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1 20A DP control switch

10

4015

Fitted with neon indicator

10

4015/3

Fitted with neon indicator and marked ’water heater‘

10

4015/31

Dimensions Mounting boxes 4015

4015/31

PACK QTY

86mm x 86mm 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Fitted with knock out position in bottom edge of plate for use with or without cord outlet. Cord outlet suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter. Two earthing terminals are fitted to the switches.

32A DP CONTROL SWITCH

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

Fitted with neon indicator

4013/3

86mm x 86mm 9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Fitted with knock-out position in bottom edge of plate for use with or without cord outlet. Cord outlet suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter. Two earthing terminals are fitted to the switches.

4013/3

45A DP CONTROL SWITCHES BS EN 60669-1

4016/3

PACK QTY

45A DP control switch

5

4016

With neon indicator

5

4016/3

Dimensions Mounting boxes

4016

l

86mm x 86mm 9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

C A P I TA L C O N T R O L

Dimensions Mounting boxes

10

7

45A DP ‘SLIM LINE’ COOKER CONTROL UNITS BS 4177 & BS 1363

l

PACK QTY

45A DP main switch and 13A switch socket outlet. Faceplate marked ‘cooker’

1

45A DP main switch and 13A switch socket with 1 neon indicators. Faceplate marked ‘cooker’

4521/1 4521/31

Dimensions 146mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9054 surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining ● ●

4521/31

● ●

Same plate size as standard twin socket. Large capacity tunnel terminals on live and neutral take up to 10mm2 cable. Two earth terminals are fitted. Separate double pole switching for both cooker and socket outlet.

45A DP COOKER CONTROL UNITS BS 4177 & BS 1363

l

PACK QTY

45A DP main switch and 13A switch socket outlet. Faceplate marked ‘cooker’

1

45A DP main switch and 13A switch socket with 1 neon indicators. Faceplate marked ‘cooker’

4520/1 4520/31

Dimensions 168mm x 114mm Mounting boxes 9052 surface or 9338/GV flush

4520/1

50A DP COOKER CONTROL UNITS

l

PACK QTY Faceplate marked ‘cooker’

1

4523

Faceplate marked ‘cooker’ and fitted with neon indicator

1

4523/3

Blank Faceplate

1

4211/BLANK

Dimensions 165mm x 178mm Mounting boxes For ‘retro fit’ applications – allows use of original flush box

C A P I TA L C O N T R O L

●

8

Durable white powder coated metal faceplate.

4523/3

45A CABLE OUTLETS

l

BS 5733 With terminals and cable clamp

PACK QTY 10

4506

10

4507

Terminals will accept 2 x 10mm2 cable

With cable clamp Cable clamp will accept 1 x 16mm2 through cable

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB632 dry lining Cable knock-out in cover prevents access to terminals before outgoing cable is fitted.

4506 4507

4506 rear view

20A CORD OUTLET

l

BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE

PACK QTY

With cable clamp

10

4075

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining Outgoing cable 2.5mm2 max with 11mm diameter max outer sheath.

4075

rear view

32A TP & N CONTROL SWITCHES BS EN 60669-1 BS EN 60947-3

l

PACK QTY

Surface metalclad switch with neon indicator Unit accommodates up to 6mm2 cable.

1

4513/WH

Surface metalclad switch with neon indicator Unit accommodates up to 16mm2 cable.

1

4514/WH

Flush metalclad switch with neon indicator 1 4515/WH Unit accommodates up to 16mm2 cable. Back box not supplied. Terminal capacity 16mm2 on all switches Dimensions 4513/WH 142mm x 82mm x 51mm 4514/WH 173mm x 122mm x 74mm 4515/WH 207mm x 146mm Mounting box 9224/BG for flush mounting unit (4515/WH)

4513/WH

Utilisation category to BS EN 60947-3 AC 22, 32A 415V. AC 23, 25A (12kW/16HP max), 415V. ● ● ● ● ●

4513/WH

On and off markings give positive indication of position. Padlocking in ‘off’ or ‘on’ position in all surface mounting switches. Internal shrouding of live terminals. Neon indicator with all versions which can be fitted in upper/lower terminals. Switches available in two sizes and flush or surface styles. See pages 36 and 55 for further details.

4514/WH

BS EN 60669-1

l

PACK QTY

50A DP control switch

5

4500

Faceplate marked ’cooker‘

5

4500/1

Fitted with neon indicator

5

4500/3

Faceplate marked ’cooker‘ and fitted with neon indicator

5

4500/31

Dimensions Mounting boxes

86mm x 146mm 9040 surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

BS EN 60947-3 rating 240V 50A category of duty AC22.

4500

4500/3

C A P I TA L C O N T R O L

50A DP CONTROL SWITCHES

9

PRODUCT MARKING SERVICE

l

A wide range of markings can be added to 13A fused connection units and double pole control switches. The majority of these markings are consistent in style, colour and position with the standard Tampoprinted ‘water heater’ marking on List No.4015/31. All of the markings offer the same high level of durability. To order any of the markings listed below, add suffix to List No. ie 4827 marked ‘fridge freezer’ = 4827/FF.

4827/3FF

4827/3DW

4827/BE

4827/3SA

MARKING

SUFFIX

MARKING

SUFFIX

air conditioner

AC

night immersion

NI

bell transformer

BE

oven

OV

cooker hood

HD

heater

PH

daytime boost

DB

security alarm

SA

dishwasher

DW

security light

SL

emergency circuit

EC

shower

SH

extractor fan

EF

shower pump

SP

freezer

FZ

storage heater

ST

fridge

FR

towel rail

TR

fridge freezer

FF

tumble dryer

TD

heater

HT

washing machine

WM

hob

HB

waste disposal

WD

humidity vent

HV

water cooler

WC

intruder alarm

IA

water heater

WA

microwave

MW

These popular markings are offered on a fast track service in the standard wiring accessories colour. For price and delivery information on other markings not listed above, or markings in blue, red, or black, our Technical Services Department.

C A P I TA L P O W E R & C O N T R O L

4013/3N

10

4013/3ST

RED ROCKERS

l

For applications where essential supply systems are in use, sockets and fused connection units with red rockers are available to order. These are ideal for use in hospitals, computer installations, etc. To order add suffix to List No. ie 4306 with red rockers = 4306/WH/RD. 4827 with red rockers = 4827/RD. For Rockergrid switches with red rockers see Rockergrid section page 48.

4304/WH/RD

4827/RD

4306/WH/RD

SHAVER SUPPLY UNIT

l

BS 3535 PART 1

PACK QTY

input

240V 50Hz 115V 50Hz output 240V 50Hz

1

2400

input

1

2400/E

{

115V 50Hz output 115V 50Hz 240V 50Hz

{

Dimensions Mounting boxes

2400

86mm x 146mm 9053 surface, SB628 flush galv. or SB631 dry lining

Complies with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) for use in rooms containing a fixed bath or shower.

LIGHT & SHAVER UNIT

l

BS 3535 PART 1, BS 4533 SECTION 102.1

PACK QTY

input

240V 50Hz output 115V 50Hz 240V 50Hz 60W 284mm tungsten lamp

1

2402

{

2402

Dimensions

458mm x 68mm x 74mm

Complies with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) for use in rooms containing a fixed bath or shower. ●

● ● ●

Tough, impact resistant, all-moulded construction – no need to bond extraneous metal work. Diff is removed complete with lamp fitting to facilitate safer lamp changes. 60W lamp can be switched independently by a separate pull switch. Moulded back-plate may be used as a template.

SHAVER SUPPLY UNIT AND LIGHT & SHAVER UNIT 20VA minimum output at rated voltage. ● Suitable for use for ‘Mains shavers only’. ● Insertion of plug switches unit on. ● Incorporates an automatic thermistor protection device. ● Accepts most standard British, Continental, American and Australian 2 pin plugs. ●

2402 backplate removed

16A CEILING SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

1 way DP with neon indicator Dimensions Mounting boxes

2161

2163

10

2161

10

2163

68.5mm diameter x 42.5mm Integral pattress for surface mounting. Can be mounted to a small circular conduit box.

Two way switch may be wired as one way. Standard pull cord/acorn is 1.5m long, in white. Fully rated for fluorescent or inductive loads. Suitable for use with 16mm x 16mm mini-trunking.

50A CEILING SWITCHES BS EN 60669-1

l

PACK QTY

1 way DP with neon and mechanical indicator Mounting boxes

2167

1

2167

Integral pattress for surface mounting. Can be mounted to a large circular conduit box.

Complies with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) for use as an isolating device. Terminals will accept up to 10mm2 cable. Standard pull cord/acorn is 1.5m long, in white. Suitable for use with 25mm x 16mm trunking. Rated for non-inductive loads only.

C A P I TA L P O W E R & C O N T R O L

2 way SP

For 6A ceiling switches see Capital Lighting section, page 15.

11

LIGHTING CONTROL The extensive Capital lighting range of plate switches and ceiling accessories combines modern styling with advanced safety design features. The standard range of ceiling accessories now offers a competitive alternative to the safety range. The new compact fluorescent lampholder allows domestic dwellings to have some form of energy efficient lighting.

Design of the Safety lampholder body is common to both pendant and batten lampholders. Ensures that the lamp must be fully inserted before the lampholder s become ‘live’. Each plate switch will accept a seek light which is housed unobtrusively in the body of the switch to help locate it in the dark – a useful aid in sheltered housing.

12

Wide concave rockers are easy to operate.

SMOKE DETECTOR & EMERGENCY LIGHT New advanced Smoke Detector & emergency light which are combined in a ceiling rose.

PIR SENSORS Minder ive infra red sensors (PIR) allow for the automatic control of lighting and other equipment.

Energy saving – Provides power only when movement is detected.

Courtesy – Automatic illumination of doorways to welcome visitors.

Security – Automatic lighting control to deter intruders.

C A P I TA L & M I N D E R L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L

Minder PIR Sensor.

13

10AX PLATE SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

4070 4170

4171 4175

4173

PACK QTY

Seeklight

1

4009

1 gang 1 way SP

10

4070

1 gang 2 way SP

10

4170

1 gang 1 way DP

10

4171

2 gang 2 way SP

10

4172

3 gang 2 way SP

10

4173

4 gang 2 way SP 1 gang intermediate 6 gang 2 way SP

5

4174

10

4175

5

4176

Dimensions

1–3 gang 86mm x 86mm 4–6 gang 146mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 1–3 gang 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 4–6 gang 9048/1 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining Two way switches can be wired as one way. Fully rated for fluorescent or inductive loads. ●

4176

All 86mm x 86mm and 146mm x 86mm switches have the facility to fit one seeklight assembly, List No.4009, as above, to assist location in the dark.

10A RETRACTIVE SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

1 gang 1 way SP marked with bell symbol

10

4096/B

1 gang 2 way SP marked with bell symbol

10

4096/2WB

1 gang 2 way SP marked ’press‘

10

4096/P

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining ●

4096/B

4096/P

●

All 86mm x 86mm and 146mm x 86mm switches have the facility to fit one seeklight assembly, List No.4009, as above, to assist location in the dark. Can be wired for normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) circuits.

DIMMER SWITCHES

l

C A P I TA L L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L

ROTARY MODULES

14

PACK QTY

1 gang 250W

5

4130

2 gang 250W

5

4132

1 gang 400W

5

4190

2 gang 400W

5

4192

Dimensions 1-2 gang 86mm x 86mm Minimum installation depth 35mm ● ●

4130

Suitable for Tungsten filament lamps. Available early 2004.

4192

400W DIMMER SWITCH BS 5518. BS EN 55014

l

PACK QTY

2 way Dimmer 400W maximum 60W minimum 240V AC only Dimensions Mounting box

2190

1

2190

86mm x 86mm 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Fitted with a fast acting fuse type tested to BS 4265: 1977 rated at 3.15A 250V, List No.6925, to protect the electronic components against short circuits which may occur when the lamp fails. Spare fuse provided.

6A ‘CORINTHIAN’ PLATE SWITCHES BS EN 60669-1 1 gang 2 way SP

10

5170

2 gang 2 way SP

10

5172

3 gang 2 way SP

10

5173

1 gang intermediate

10

5175

10

5177

1 gang retractive Dimensions Mounting boxes

5170

5172 trim removed

86mm x 86mm 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Fully rated for fluorescent or inductive loads. The screwless terminals are for use with 1.0–1.5mm2 or 3/029" PVC insulated cable. Two way switches can be wired as one way. ● ●

Clip-on trim conceals fixing screws. Extra wide rocker makes Corinthian ideal for use in sheltered housing installations.

6A CEILING SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

1 way SP

10

2041

2 way SP

10

2141

10

2147

Retractive SP Dimensions Mounting boxes

2041

68.5mm dia x 42.5mm Complete with pattress for surface mounting. Can be mounted to small circular conduit box.

Two way switch can be wired as one way. Retractive switch can be wired for normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) circuits. Standard pull cord/acorn is 1.5m long in white. Retractive pull cord/acorn is 2m long in red. Fully rated for fluorescent or inductive loads. Variations to retractive switch are available to order. For 16A & 50A ceiling switches see Capital Power & Control section, page 11.

2147

10A ARCHITRAVE SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY 10

4077

1 gang retractive SP marked with bell symbol

10

4097/B

1 gang retractive SP marked ’press‘

10

4097/P

1 gang 2 way SP

10

4177

2 gang 2 way SP

10

4178

1 gang 1 way DP

10

4179

10

4180

Dimensions

4097/B

4097/P

4178

1 2 Mounting boxes 1 2

gang gang gang gang

32mm x 86mm 32mm x 146mm 4005 surface or 9257/BG flush 4006 surface or 9258/BG flush

Two way switches can be wired as one way. Retractive switches can be wired for normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) circuits.Fully rated for fluorescent or inductive loads.

SHAVER SUPPLY UNIT BS 3535 PART 1 input 240V 50Hz input 115V 50Hz

PACK QTY output 115V 50Hz 240V 50Hz

{ output { 115V 50Hz 240V 50Hz

1

2400

1

2400/E

LIGHT & SHAVER UNIT BS 3535 PART 1, BS 4533 SECTION 102.1 input 240V 50Hz 2402

output 115V 50Hz 240V 50Hz

{

PACK QTY 1

2402

C A P I TA L L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L

1 gang 1 way SP

1 gang intermediate

4077 4177 4179 4180

l

PACK QTY

60W 284mm tungsten lamp For more information on the Shaver Unit see page 11.

15

SAFETY LAMPHOLDERS

l

BS EN 61184, T2 RATING

PACK QTY

Safety pendant lampholder

20

5850

Safety batten lampholder

1

5851

Home office shield

10

5801

Fixed terminals on pendant lampholder accept 1.0mm cable. Batten lampholder has terminals for live, neutral, loop in and protective earth. Fixing centres 50.8mm. Fixed terminal strip on batten lampholder accepts 1.5mm cable. Home office shield supplied with the safety batten lampholder. Base diameter 92mm.

5850

●

●

5851

‘Wipe clean’ s avoid lamp seizure to pins making for safe and easy lamp replacement. Cord grip on pendant lampholder prevents strain on the terminal wiring.

5801

SAFETY PENDANT SETS

l

PACK QTY With 6" cord

10

5855

With 9" cord

10

5855/9

With 12" cord

10

5855/12

Comprises safety ceiling rose (List No.5860) and pendant lampholder (List No.5850), supplied with appropriate length of heat resistant 0.75mm2 twin core circular cord to BS 6141 for service loads up to 2.5kg.

C A P I TA L L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L

5855

10

5856

With 6" cord, standard ceiling rose 3443 and safety lampholder 5850.

10

5855/S

With 9" cord, standard ceiling rose 3443 and safety lampholder 5850.

10

5855/S9

With 12" cord, standard ceiling rose 3443 and safety lampholder 5850.

10

5855/S12

Cord supplied is heat resistant 0.75mm2 twin core circular cord to BS 6141 for service loads up to 2.5kg.

5855/S

SAFETY CEILING ROSE

l

BS 67

PACK QTY

Safety ceiling rose

5860

10

5860

10

5861

Terminals for live, neutral, loop in and protective earth. Fixed terminal strip accepts 1.5mm cable. For service loads up to 2.5kg. Fixing centres 50.8mm. Base diameter 92mm. ●

Cord grip prevents strain on the terminal wiring.

Heavy duty ceiling rose Terminals for live, neutral, loop in and protective earth. Base diameter 81mm. ●

● ●

5861

16

With 6" cord, heavy duty ceiling rose 5861 and safety lampholder 5850.

●

Two screw cover fixing giving strong secure fixing and automatic earthing of decorative luminaires. 15kg load capacity. Integral pattress for surface mounting. Can be mounted on circular conduit box.

LOW ENERGY LAMPHOLDERS

l

10/13W LOW ENERGY LAMPHOLDERS FOR 4 PIN CFLs PACK QTY 6” pendant set with compact fluorescent lampholder

1

3450/CFL

9” pendant set with compact fluorescent lampholder

1

3450/9CFL

Compact fluorescent lampholder

1

3442/CFL

● ●

3450/CFL

●

Lampshade requires 42mm diameter. Will accept G24 4 pin plug in lamp. See page 112 for technical details.

STANDARD STRAIGHT BATTEN LAMPHOLDERS BS EN 61184, T2 RATING

3410

3420

Batten lampholder, 3 terminal direct wiring with short skirt

10

3410

Batten lampholder, seperate 4 way terminal block with Home Office skirt

10

3412

Batten lampholder, integral terminal block with short skirt

10

3420

Batten lampholder, integral terminal block with Home Office skirt

10

3422

Dimensions ● ● ● ● ●

3422

l

PACK QTY

84mm x 162mm x 140mm

50.8mm fixing centres. Non-rising terminals. Non-stick skirt. 3 sets of knockouts are supplied on units with integral terminal block. 3420, 3422 fitted with heat resistant tails.

3412

BS EN 61184, T2 RATING Angle batten lampholder, seperate 4 way terminal block with Home Office skirt ● ● ● ● ●

l

PACK QTY 10

3432

Lampholder is fitted with heat-resistant tails. Supplied with integral backplate. 50.8mm fixing centres. Non-rising terminals. Non-rising skirt.

3432

STANDARD PENDANT SETS & LAMPHOLDERS BS 67 & BS EN 61184, T2 RATING

l

PACK QTY

Pendant lampholder, T2 rating with spring plungers

10

3442

Pendant set with 6” cord

10

3450

Pendant set with 9” cord

10

3450/9

Pendant sets comprise ceiling rose (List No 3443) and pendant lampholder (List No. 3442), supplied with appropriate length of heat resistant 0.75mm2 twin core circular cord. ●

3442

3450

Lampholder is constructed from one-piece thermoplastic interior.

C A P I TA L L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L

STANDARD ANGLE BATTEN LAMPHOLDERS

17

STANDARD CEILING ROSE

l

BS 67

PACK QTY

Ceiling rose with integral terminal block ● ● ● ●

10

3443

2

Terminals accept up to 1.5mm cable. Separate earth terminals with 6mm2 capacity. 50.8mm fixing centres. 3 sets of knockouts.

3443

STANDARD JUNCTION BOXES BS 6220

PACK QTY

20A 4 terminal junction box, white

10

3462/WH

20A 4 terminal junction box, black

10

3462/BK

30A 3 terminal junction box, white

10

3463/WH

30A 3 terminal junction box, black

10

3463/BK

●

● ●

3462/WH

l

Slotted pillar-type terminals accept a maximum 4 x 4.0mm2 (30A) or 4 x 1.5mm2 (20A) twin and earth cables. Shutters on cover close any entry holes not in use. clear symbols indicate which entries are open and closed.

3463/BK

ANCILLIARY ITEMS

l

C A P I TA L L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L

PACK QTY

18

3401

3402

7410RD 6900

7697

Replacement standard short skirt

50

3401

Replacement standard Home Office skirt

50

3402

1.5m long white pull cord & white acorn

1

6900

2m long red pull cord & red acorn

1

6900/1RD

2m long white pull cord with red acorn

1

6900/1

100m ball of white pull cord

1

6900/2

100m ball of red pull cord

1

6900/2RD

Ceiling Switch acorn, red

1

7410RD

Ceiling Switch acorn, white

1

7410WH

Neon indicator for 50A ceiling switch

1

7697

APPLEBY PHOTO CELL

l

PACK QTY 10A dusk till dawn sensor (70 lux) mounted in box 75 x 75 x 50mm

1

TNS/1/BK

10A dusk till dawn sensor (70 lux) mounted in box 100 x 100 x 50mm

1

TNS/2/BK

10A dusk till dawn sensor (70 lux) mounted in box 150 x 150 x 50mm

1

TNS/3/BK

● ●

TNS/1/BK

Provides a facility to remotely switch lighting at a pre-set level of light (70 lux). Enclosure is rated at IP55.

MINDER 90° AND MINDER 220° SENSORS IP55 90° Sensor 220° Sensor Dimensions ● ● ● ●

Dimensions

● ●

1

6878

l

PACK QTY

280° Sensor

6878

6852

Minder 90° and Minder 220° can be swivelled vertically +90°, -40° Sensor head can be swivelled horizontally +/-65° Can be wall or ceiling mounted. Minder 90° and 220˚ offer rear-field “anti-creep” protection.

IP55

●

1 102mm x 102mm x 182mm

MINDER 280° SENSOR

●

l

PACK QTY

1

6880

102mm x 102mm x 182mm

Minder 280° can be swivelled vertically +90° -40° Sensor head can be swivelled horizontally +/- 65° Can be wall or ceiling mounted. Minder 280° offers rear-field “anti-creep” protection.

Full technical information - see page 108

MINDER EMERGENCY LIGHT & SMOKE DETECTOR BS 5446 PART1 Minder emergency light and smoke detector complete with Safety lampholder and 6” flex

1

6999

●

Smoke detector contains 10 year soldered in rechargeable lithium cells for mains power failure back up.

●

Alarm sounder is set to approximately 85 decebels

●

A new and unique product comprising of an advanced ionisation type smoke detector and emergency light, together with a signalling unit combined into a domestic ceiling rose

●

High performance 2.5%obs eliminates most nuisance alarms

●

Upon failure of your mains electricity supply either by power cut or fire, the emergency light incorporated in the unit will illuminate an average 3 metre square room for a period up to 2 hours, allowing safe convenient movement around you home

●

Dusk to dawn feature prevents activation of the emergency light when power failures occur during daylight hours. The unit will stay in standby mode until power supply is resumed, or until darkness falls, when it will activate your emergency lighting

●

Replaces an existing ceiling rose, so it is inconspicuous and aesthetically pleasing

●

No batteries required, maintenance free, fully sealed, tamper proof unit

6999 shown with supplied blanking plug

MINDER LIGHTING CONTROL

6999 shown with supplied safety lampholder and 6” flex

l

PACK QTY

Full technical information - see page 109

19

Easily removed ‘ears’ to allow for alternative flat plate option. Note: do not remove ‘ears’ for low profile option.

20

Interior allows wiring to be terminated without securing front plate.

Elongated grid fixing hole allows correct alignment of the interior if the installation box has not been mounted squarely.

Fascia plate is secured after fitting to avoid accidental damage during the installation or during later decoration.

An extensive range of power, control and lighting accessories, available in a range of high quality metal finishes as either screw-fit flat plate or clip-on screwless low profile plate. With no compromise between style and function, the Platinum range is slim, stylish and packed with solid Crabtree engineering.

P L AT I N U M L O W P R O F I L E & F L AT P L AT E 21

Interior

Plate

Clip on location holes

LOW PROFILE ●

Standard Finishes:

l

HPC

- Highly Polished Chrome - Black moulded insert

SC/WH - Satin Chrome - White moulded insert PB

●

Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 13A 2 gang DP Switched Socket Interior in Satin Chrome = 1316/1SC/WH ie 2 gang Switched Socket Plate in Satin Chrome = 7506/SC

●

All interiors are supplied with appropriate fixing grids

●

Other finishes are available - see Technical section page 112

● ●

1316/1SC/WH

7506/SC

Interior to box fixing screws

- Polished Brass - Black moulded insert

13A SWITCHED SOCKET

1314 / 1SC / WH 7504 / SC

1316 / 1PB 7506 / PB

BS 1363

l

1 gang DP switched socket

Interior Plate

1314/1_ _ 7504/_ _

1 gang DP switched socket with neon

Interior Plate

1314/13_ _ 7504/3_ _

2 gang DP switched socket

Interior Plate

1316/1_ _ 7506/_ _

2 gang DP switched socket with neons

Interior Plate

1316/13_ _ 7506/3_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 88mm x 88mm, 2 gang 88mm x 148mm Installation Box depth 35mm ● All sockets are supplied as dual earth.

13A FUSED CONNECTION UNIT

1832/ 13PB 7508/ 3PB

1832/ 1HPC 7508/ HPC

BS 1363

l

13A switched fuse connection unit

Interior Plate

1832/1_ _ 7508/_ _

13A switched fuse connection unit with neon

Interior Plate

1832/13_ _ 7508/3_ _

13A switched FCU with cord outlet

Interior Plate

1837/1_ _ 7533/_ _

13A switched FCU with cord outlet & neon

Interior Plate

1837/13_ _ 7533/3_ _

2A round pin unswitched socket

Interior Plate

1075/1_ _ 7560/_ _

5A round pin switched socket

Interior Plate

1240/1_ _ 7578/_ _

5A round pin unswitched socket

Interior Plate

1340/1_ _ 7579/_ _

15A round pin switched socket

Interior Plate

1272/1_ _ 7515/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 88mm x 88mm Installation Box depth 35mm

P L AT I N U M L O W P R O F I L E

2, 5 & 15A ROUND PIN SOCKET

22

1272/ 1SC/WH 7515/ SC

l

Dimensions 1 gang 88mm x 88mm Installation Box depth 35mm

6A TP ISOLATOR SWITCH 6A triple pole isolator switch

BS EN60669-1

l

Interior Plate

1017/1_ _ 7505/_ _

Interior Plate

1410/1* 7510/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 88mm x 88mm Installation Box depth 35mm

SHAVER SUPPLY UNIT shaver supply unit 1017/ 1HPC 7505/ HPC

l

Dimensions 88mm x 148mm Installation Box depth 55mm * Black moulded insert as standard, if required with White moulded insert add /WH

LOW PROFILE

BS EN60669-1

l

10AX PLATE SWITCH

1170/ 1HPC 7501/ HPC

1172/ 1PB 7502/ PB

l

1 gang 2 way 10AX switch

Interior Plate

1170/1_ _ 7501/_ _

1 gang 1 way 10A retractive switch

Interior Plate

1096/1_ _ 7501/_ _

2 gang 2 way 10AX switch

Interior Plate

1172/1_ _ 7502/_ _

3 gang 2 way 10AX switch

Interior Plate

1173/1_ _ 7503/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 88mm x 88mm Installation Box depth 16mm 1 & 2 gang, 25mm 3 gang

DIMMER-ROTARY

l

1 gang 250W

7250/D1_ _

2 gang 250W

7250/D2_ _

1 gang 400W

7400/D1_ _

2 gang 400W

7400/D2_ _

Suitable for Tungsten Loads. Other options available please Technical Services.

7250/ D1SC

7400/ D2PB

Dimensions 1 & 2 gang 88mm x 88mm Installation Box depth 35mm

20A DP CONTROL SWITCH 20A DP control switch

Interior Plate

1011/1_ _ 7520/_ _

20A DP control switch with neon

Interior Plate

1011/13_ _ 7520/3_ _

32A DP CONTROL SWITCH 1011/ 13PB 7520/ 3PB

1012/ 13SC 7532/ 3SC

1512/ 1HPC 7545/ HPC

BS EN60669-1

l

32A DP control switch

Interior Plate

1012/1_ _ 7532/_ _

32A DP control switch with neon

Interior Plate

1012/13_ _ 7532/3_ _

45A DP CONTROL SWITCH

1512/ 13PB 7545/ 3PB

BS EN60669-1

l

BS EN60669-1

l

45A DP control switch

Interior Plate

1512/1_ _ 7545/_ _

45A DP control switch with neon

Interior Plate

1512/13_ _ 7545/3_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 88mm x 88mm

45A DP COOKER CONTROL UNIT

l

BS 4177 & BS1363

Cooker control unit

Interior Plate

1522/1_ _ 7546/_ _

Cooker control unit with neon

Interior Plate

1522/13_ _ 7546/3 _ _

1 gang communication module frame

Interior Plate

1091/1 7507/_ _

2 gang communication module frame

Interior Plate

1092/1 7509/_ _

Dimensions 88mm x 148mm 1522/ 13PB 7546/ 3PB

Installation Box depth 35mm

COMMUNICATION PLATES

l

Communication ‘Datapak’ accessories shown on page 71

BLANK PLATES 1091/1 7507/ SC

1092/1 7509/ HPC

l

1 gang blank plate

1091/1 + 7575/_ _

2 gang blank plate

1092/1 + 7577/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 88mm x 88mm 2 gang 88mm x 148mm

P L AT I N U M L O W P R O F I L E

Installation Box depth 35mm

Installation Box depth 35mm

23

Plate

Interior

Plate to grid fixing screws

FLAT PLATE ●

l

Standard Finishes:

PSS

- Polished Stainless Steel - Black moulded insert

SS/WH - Stainless Steel - White moulded insert PB

●

Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 13A 2 gang DP Switched Socket Interior + Neon in Polished Brass = 1316/13PB ie 2 gang Switched Socket Plate + Neon in Polished Brass = 8506/3PB

●

All interiors are supplied with appropriate fixing grids

●

Other finishes available - see Technical Data page 112

● ●

1316/13PB 8506/3PB Interior to box fixing screws

- Polished Brass - Black moulded insert

13A SWITCHED SOCKET

1314 / 13SS/ WH 8504 / 3SS

1316 / 1PSS 8506 / PSS

BS 1363

l

1 gang DP switched socket

Interior Plate

1314/1_ _ 8504/_ _

1 gang DP switched socket with neon

Interior Plate

1314/13_ _ 8504/3_ _

2 gang DP switched socket

Interior Plate

1316/1_ _ 8506/_ _

2 gang DP switched socket with neons

Interior Plate

1316/13_ _ 8506/3_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 86mm x 86mm, 2 gang 86mm x 146mm Installation Box depth 35mm ● All sockets are supplied as dual earth.

13A FUSED CONNECTION UNIT

1832/ 13PSS 8508/ 3PSS

1832/ 1PB 8508/ PB

BS 1363

l

13A switched fuse connection unit

Interior Plate

1832/1_ _ 8508/_ _

13A switched fuse connection unit with neon

Interior Plate

1832/13_ _ 8508/3_ _

13A switched FCU with cord outlet

Interior Plate

1837/1_ _ 8533/_ _

13A switched FCU with cord outlet & neon

Interior Plate

1837/13_ _ 8533/3_ _

2A round pin unswitched socket

Interior Plate

1075/1_ _ 8560/_ _

5A round pin switched socket

Interior Plate

1240/1_ _ 8578/_ _

5A round pin unswitched socket

Interior Plate

1340/1_ _ 8579/_ _

15A round pin switched socket

Interior Plate

1272/1_ _ 8515/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 86mm x 86mm Installation Box depth 35mm

P L AT I N U M F L AT P L AT E

2, 5 & 15A ROUND PIN SOCKET

1272/ 1PB 8515/ PB

l

Dimensions 1 gang 86mm x 86mm Installation Box depth 35mm

6A TP ISOLATOR SWITCH 6A triple pole isolator switch

l

BS EN60669-1 Interior Plate

1017/1_ _ 8505/_ _

Interior Plate

1410/1* 8510/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 86mm x 86mm Installation Box depth 35mm

SHAVER SUPPLY UNIT Shaver supply unit 1017/ 1PSS 8505/ PSS

l

Dimensions 86mm x 146mm Installation Box depth 55mm * Black moulded insert as standard, if required with White moulded insert add /WH

24

FLAT PLATE

BS EN60669-1

l

10AX PLATE SWITCH

1170/ 1SS 8501/ SS

1173/ 1PB 8503/ PB

l

1 gang 2 way 10AX switch

Interior Plate

1170/1_ _ 8501/_ _

1 gang 1 way 10A retractive switch

Interior Plate

1096/1_ _ 8501/_ _

2 gang 2 way 10AX switch

Interior Plate

1172/1_ _ 8502/_ _

3 gang 2 way 10AX switch

Interior Plate

1173/1_ _ 8503/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 86mm x 86mm Installation Box depth 16mm 1 & 2 gang, 25mm 3 gang

DIMMER-ROTARY

l

250W 1 gang

8250/D1_ _

250W 2 gang

8250/D2_ _

400W 1 gang

8400/D1_ _

400W 2 gang

8400/D2_ _

Suitable for Tungsten Loads. Other options available please Technical Services.

8250/ D1PSS

8400/ D2PB

Dimensions 1 & 2 gang 86mm x 86mm Installation Box depth 35mm

20A DP CONTROL SWITCH 20A DP control switch

Interior Plate

1011/1_ _ 8520/_ _

20A DP control switch with neon

Interior Plate

1011/13_ _ 8520/3_ _

32A DP CONTROL SWITCH 1011/ 13SS 8520/ 3SS

1012/ 1PSS 8532/ PSS

1512/ 13PB 8545/ 3PB

BS EN60669-1

l

32A DP control switch

Interior Plate

1012/1_ _ 8532/_ _

32A DP control switch with neon

Interior Plate

1012/13_ _ 8532/3_ _

45A DP CONTROL SWITCH

1012/ 13PB 8532/ 3PB

BS EN60669-1

l

BS EN60669-1

l

45A DP control switch

Interior Plate

1512/1_ _ 8545/_ _

45A DP control switch with neon

Interior Plate

1512/13_ _ 8545/3_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 86mm x 86mm Installation Box depth 35mm

l

BS 4177 & BS1363

Cooker control unit

Interior Plate

1522/1_ _ 8546/_ _

Cooker control unit with neons

Interior Plate

1522/13_ _ 8546/3 _ _

1 gang communication module frame

Interior Plate

1091/1 8507/_ _

2 gang communication module frame

Interior Plate

1092/1 8509/_ _

Dimensions 86mm x 146mm Installation Box depth 35mm

1522/ 13PB 8546/ 3PB

COMMUNICATION PLATES

l

Communication ‘Datapak’ accessories shown on page 71

BLANK PLATES 1091/1 8507/ PB

1092/1 8509/ SS

l

1 gang blank plate

1091/1 + 8585/_ _

2 gang blank plate

1092/1 + 8577/_ _

Dimensions 1 gang 86mm x 86mm, 2 gang 86mm x 146mm

P L AT I N U M F L AT P L AT E

45A DP COOKER CONTROL UNIT

Installation Box depth 35mm

25

PLATINUM GRID Switch

Grid plate

Clip on location holes

Complete Assembly

4430/7PB Grid yoke 1901 Grid yoke to box fixing screws

7711/PB

GRID PLATES - LOW PROFILE Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate

for for for for for for

1 2 3 4 6 8

gang gang gang gang gang gang

Dimensions

7711/SC

7713/PB

_ _ _ _ _ _

All the following plates are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Polished Brass (PB) and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC)

Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate

for for for for for for

1 2 3 4 6 8

gang gang gang gang gang gang

l

grid grid grid grid grid grid

Dimensions

8714/SS

7711/_ 7712/_ 7713/_ 7714/_ 7716/_ 7718/_

1-2 gang 88mm x 88mm 3-4 gang 148mm x 88mm 6-8 gang 148mm x 148mm

GRID PLATE - FLAT PLATE

8712/PSS

l

grid grid grid grid grid grid

8711/_ 8712/_ 8713/_ 8714/_ 8716/_ 8718/_

_ _ _ _ _ _

1-2 gang 86mm x 86mm 3-4 gang 146mm x 86mm 6-8 gang 146mm x 146mm

All the following plates are available in Stainless Steel (SS), Polished Brass (PB) and Polished Stainless Steel (PSS)

GRID YOKES 1 2 3 4 6 8

gang gang gang gang gang gang

l

yoke yoke yoke yoke yoke yoke

1901 1902 1903 1904 1906 1908

P L AT I N U M G R I D

When mounting grid yokes for use with the flat plate, remove the outer fixing ears

1901

1903

GRID SWITCHES - NO OUTER TRIM 10AX 1 way 10AX 2 way 20A 1 way 20A 2 way 20A double pole 20A intermediate

4430/7HPC 4450/7PB 4460/7PSS 4530/7SC 4550/7SS

l

4430/7_ 4530/7_ 4450/7_ 4550/7_ 4460/7_ 4535/7_

All the following Switches are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Highly Polished Chrome (HPC), Polished Brass (PB), Stainless Steel (SS), and Polished Stainless Steel (PSS)

Installation Box depth 35mm Rockergrid items shown on page 48 & 49 will not fit onto the above plates.

26

_ _ _ _ _ _

ROCKERGRID FOR PLATINUM RANGE Switch

Complete Assembly

Grid plate

Clip on location holes

4530/6HPC Grid yoke 1901 7511/HPC Grid yoke to box fixing screws

GRID PLATES - LOW PROFILE Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate

for for for for for for

1 2 3 4 6 8

gang gang gang gang gang gang

Dimensions

7511/SC

7513/PB

7511/_ 7512/_ 7513/_ 7514/_ 7516/_ 7518/_

All the following plates are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Polished Brass (PB) and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC)

for for for for for for

1 2 3 4 6 8

gang gang gang gang gang gang

l

grid grid grid grid grid grid

Dimensions

8511/_ 8512/_ 8513/_ 8514/_ 8516/_ 8518/_

_ _ _ _ _ _

1-2 gang 86mm x 86mm 3-4 gang 146mm x 86mm 6-8 gang 146mm x 146mm

All the following plates are available in Stainless Steel (SS), Polished Brass (PB) and Polished Stainless Steel (PSS)

GRID YOKES 1 2 3 4 6 8

gang gang gang gang gang gang

l

yoke yoke yoke yoke yoke yoke

1901 1902 1903 1904 1906 1908

When mounting Grid yokes for use with the Flat plate, remove the outer fixing ears

1901

1903

GRID SWITCHES

l

10AX 1 way 10AX 2 way 20A 1 way 20A 2 way 20A double pole 20A intermediate

4430/6_ 4530/6_ 4450/6_ 4550/6_ 4460/6_ 4535/6_

_ _ _ _ _ _

All the following Switches are available in Satin Chrome (SC/WH), Stainless Steel (SS/WH), Highly Polished Chrome (HPC), Polished Brass (PB) and Polished Stainless Steel (PSS)

4530/6HPC 4550/6PB 4460/6PSS 4450/6SC/WH 4430/6SS/WH

Other moulding finishes available as made to order i.e. 4450/6SC (black surround)

Installation Box depth 35mm

P L AT I N U M R O C K E R G R I D F O R P L AT I N U M

Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate Plate

8514/SS

_ _ _ _ _ _

1-2 gang 88mm x 88mm 3-4 gang 148mm x 88mm 6-8 gang 148mm x 148mm

GRID PLATE S - FLAT PLATE

8512/PSS

l

grid grid grid grid grid grid

Rockergrid items shown on page 48 & 49 will fit onto the above plates.

27

TOGGLE SWITCHES AND PLATES Switch

Toggle fixing screw

Grid yoke

Complete Assembly

Grid plate

5430/PB

Outer locking ring 1901

Grid yoke to box fixing screws

8T01/PB

Plate to yoke fixing screws

TOGGLE PLATES-LOW PROFILE Plate Plate Plate Plate

for for for for

1 2 3 4

gang gang gang gang

grid grid grid grid

Dimensions

l

7T01/_ 7T02/_ 7T03/_ 7T04/_

_ _ _ _

1-2 gang 88mm x 88mm 3-4 gang 148mm x 88mm

All the following plates are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Polished Brass (PB) and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC)

P L AT I N U M T O G G L E S W I T C H E S A N D P L AT E S

7T01/SC

28

7T03/HPC

All plates come complete with outer locking ring in appropriate finish

TOGGLE PLATES-FLAT PLATE Plate Plate Plate Plate

for for for for

1 2 3 4

gang gang gang gang

grid grid grid grid

Dimensions

l

8T01/_ 8T02/_ 8T03/_ 8T04/_

_ _ _ _

1-2 gang 86mm x 86mm 3-4 gang 146mm x 86mm

All the following plates are available in Stainless Steel (SS), Polished Brass (PB) and Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) All plates come complete with outer locking ring in appropriate finish

8T02/PSS

8T04/PB

GRID YOKES 1 2 3 4

gang gang gang gang

l

yoke yoke yoke yoke

1901 1902 1903 1904

When mounting grid yokes for use with the flat plate, remove the outer fixing ears

1901

1903

TOGGLE SWITCHES

l

10AX 2 way single pole 20A 2 way single pole 20A 2 way and off single pole

5430/_ _ 5550/_ _ 5552/_ _

All the following switches are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Highly Polished Chrome (HPC) and Polished Brass (PB)

Installation Box depth 35mm One fixing key supplied per pack of 5

5430/PB 5550/SC 5552/HPC

COMPLETE ASSEMBLIES FINISHES AVAILABLE

l

LOW PROFILE

FLAT PLATE

SC/WH Satin Chrome White interior

SS/WH Stainless Steel White interior

HPC Highly Polished Chrome Black interior

PSS Polished Stainless Steel Black interior

PB Polished Brass Black interior

PB Polished Brass Black interior

Fully assembled products come complete with display packaging

13A SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLET

l

LOW PROFILE

FLAT PLATE

1 gang DP switched socket

7314/_ _

8314/_ _

2 gang DP switched socket

7316/_ _

8316/_ _

Dimensions

88mm x 88mm 148mm x 88mm

86mm x 86mm 146mm x 86mm

1 gang 2 gang

Installation Box depth 35mm

8314/PB

7316/SC/WH

13A FUSED CONNECTION UNIT

l

LOW PROFILE

FLAT PLATE

DP switched

7832/_ _

8832/_ _

DP switched with neon

7832/3_ _

8832/3_ _

Dimensions

88mm x 88mm

86mm x 86mm

LOW PROFILE

FLAT PLATE

1 gang 2 way

7170/_ _

8170/_ _

2 gang 2 way

7172/_ _

8172/_ _

3 gang 2 way

7173/_ _

8173/_ _

Dimensions

88mm x 88mm

86mm x 86mm

Installation Box depth 35mm

7832/3PB

10AX PLATE SWITCH

l

Installation Box depth 1 & 2 gang 16mm, 3 gang 25mm 8170/PSS

7173/SC

20A DP CONTROL SWITCH

FLAT PLATE

20A DP control switch

7011/_ _

8011/_ _

20A DP control sw + neon

7011/3_ _

8011/3_ _

Dimensions

88mm x 88mm

86mm x 86mm

Installation Box depth 35mm

8011/3SS

7011/HPC

l

LOW PROFILE

P L AT I N U M C O M P L E T E A S S E M B L I E S

8832/3PSS

29

Satin Chrome

30

Highly Polished Chrome

Bronze

Oyster Gold

Unique labyrinth switch design minimises visible arc flash and prevents front access to live parts whilst wide concave rockers are easy to operate.

METAL PLATE The sophistication of Satin Chrome and Highly Polished Chrome along with the elegance of Bronze and Oyster Gold finishes provide stylish options to specifiers of a comprehensive matching range of wiring accessories.

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E 31

All the following list numbers are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR), and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC). Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) is available made to order. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 4314 – 1 gang switch socket in Bronze = 4314/BZ.

13A FLUSH SOCKET OUTLETS

l

BS 1363

PACK QTY

1 gang SP switched

10

4314/_ _

2 gang SP switched

5

4316/_ _

1 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

10

4314/3_ _

2 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

5

4316/3_ _

1 gang unswitched

10

8255/_ _

2 gang unswitched

5

8257/_ _

Dimensions 8255/SC

4316/YR

1 gang 86mm x 86mm 2 gang 146mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 1 gang 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 2 gang 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining Double pole switched versions are available to order – Add suffix D to List No. ie Double pole 4314/BZ = 4314/DBZ.

13A FLUSH SOCKET OUTLETS WITH METAL ROCKERS l BS 1363

PACK QTY

1 gang SP switched

10

4314/_ _/9

2 gang SP switched

5

4316/_ _/9

1 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

10

4314/3_ _/9

2 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

5

4316/3_ _/9

Dimensions

4314/YR/9

4316/3SC/9

1 gang 86mm x 86mm 2 gang 146mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 1 gang 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 2 gang 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining Double Pole switched versions available to order- Add suffix D to List No.ie: Double Pole 4316/3SC/9 = 4316/3DSC/9.

13A FLUSH FUSED CONNECTION UNITS BS 1363 Unswitched

10

4831/_ _

Unswitched with neon

10

4831/3_ _

DP switched

10

4832/_ _

DP switched with neon indicator

10

4832/3_ _

Unswitched with cord outlet

10

4836/_ _

DP switched with cord outlet

10

4837/_ _

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E

DP switched with cord outlet and neon indicator 10

4837/3_ _

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 4831/SC

4832/3BZ

All fused connection units: Fused on the line side with 13A fuse link ASTA certified and marked to BS 1362. For spare fuse links see page 6. Cord outlet suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter. Two earthing terminals are fitted to the unit.

13A FLUSH FUSED CONNECTION UNITS WITH METAL ROCKER l BS 1363

PACK QTY

DP switched

10

4832/_ _/9

DP switched with neon indicator

10

4832/3_ _/9

DP switched with cord outlet

10

4837/_ _/9

DP switched with cord outlet & neon indicator

10

4837/3_ _/9

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 4832/YR/9

4832/3BZ/9

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

32

l

PACK QTY

All the following list numbers are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR), and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC). Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 4214 – 1 gang switch socket in Bronze = 4214/BZ.

13A SURFACE SOCKET OUTLETS BS 1363 1 gang SP switched

10

4214/_ _

2 gang SP switched

5

4216/_ _

1 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

10

4214/3_ _

2 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

5

4216/3_ _

1 gang unswitched

10

9685/_ _

2 gang unswitched

5

9687/_ _

Dimensions 4214/BZ

l

PACK QTY

4216/3SC

1 gang 82mm x 82mm x 44mm 2 gang 142mm x 82mm x 44mm

For boxes without knock-outs see page 68. Double pole switched versions available to order – Add suffix D to List No. ie Double pole 4214/BZ = 4214/DBZ.

13A SURFACE SOCKET OUTLETS WITH METAL ROCKERS l BS 1363 1 gang SP switched

10

4214/_ _/9

2 gang SP switched

5

4216/_ _/9

1 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

10

4214/3_ _/9

2 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

5

4216/3_ _/9

Dimensions

4214/SC/9

4216/3BZ/9

PACK QTY

1 gang 82mm x 82mm x 44mm 2 gang 142mm x 82mm x 44mm

For boxes without knockouts, see page 68 . Double Pole switched versions available to order- Add suffix D to List No.ie: Double Pole = 4216/3DSC/9.

13A SURFACE FUSED CONNECTION UNITS BS 1363 Unswitched

4847/3YR

10

4841/_ _

Unswitched with neon

10

4841/3 _ _

DP switched

10

4842/_ _

DP switched with neon

10

4842/3_ _

Unswitched with cord outlet

10

4846/_ _

DP switched with cord outlet

10

4847/_ _

DP switched with cord outlet and neon

10

4847/3_ _

Dimensions

82mm x 82mm x 44mm

13A SAFETY SOCKETS – RCD PROTECTION BS 7288

l

PACK QTY

SURFACE 1 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4424/A01_ _

1 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4424/A03_ _

2 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4426/A01_ _

2 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4426/A03_ _

Dimensions 4424/A01BZ

142mm x 82mm x 44mm

See page 102 for further information. All available with two earth terminals to enable installation to comply with section 607 (wiring regulations) Add suffix /TE to List No = 4416/A03SC/TE.

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E

4846/SC

l

PACK QTY

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

33

All the following list numbers are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR), and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC). Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) is available made to order. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 2340 – 5A 3 pin switched in Satin Chrome = 2340/SC.

13A SAFETY SOCKETS – RCD PROTECTION BS 7288

l

PACK QTY

FLUSH 1 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4414/A01_ _

1 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4414/A03_ _

2 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4416/A01_ _

2 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4416/A03_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes

4416/A03BZ

146mm x 86mm 9048 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

See page 102 for further information. All available with two earth terminals to enable installation to comply with section 607 (wiring regulations) Add suffix /TE to List No = 4416/A03SC/TE.

50A DP CONTROL SWITCHES BS EN 60669-1

l

PACK QTY

DP switch DP switch with neon indicator Dimensions Mounting boxes

5

4512/_ _

5

4512/3_ _

86mm x 146mm 9040 surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

BS EN 60947-3 rating 240V 50A category of duty AC22. For associated cable outlets see page 8.

4512/YR

4512/3SC

2A, 5A, 15A FLUSH SOCKET OUTLETS

l

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E

PACK QTY 2A 3 pin unswitched

10

8075/_ _*

5A 3 pin switched

10

2340/_ _

15A 3 pin switched

10

2372/_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes

86mm x 86mm 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

* Unshuttered version available for export only – Add suffix E to List No. ie 8075/BZE. 8075/SCE

2340/BZ

15A 125V AMERICAN STANDARD FLUSH SOCKET OUTLETS l NEMA CONFIGURATION 5–15 1 gang

10

7161/_ _

2 gang - vertical

5

7162/_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes

7161/SC

PACK QTY

1 gang 86mm x 86mm 2 gang 86mm x 146mm 1 gang 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 2 gang 9048 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

34

All the following list numbers are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR), and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC). Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) is available made to order. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 6170 – 1 gang switch socket in Bronze = 6170/BZ.

10AX PLATE SWITCHES

PACK QTY

1 gang 2 way

10

6170/_ _

2 gang 2 way

10

6172/_ _

3 gang 2 way

10

6173/_ _

1 gang Intermediate

10

6175/_ _

1 gang retractive (press)

10

6096/_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes 6170/BZ 6175/BZ

6172/SC

l

BS EN 60669-1

86mm x 86mm 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Two way switches can be wired as one way. Fully rated for fluorescent or inductive loads. (Except 6096, 10A only) Retractive switch can be wired for normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) circuits.

20A DP CONTROL SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

DP switch

10

4011/_ _

DP switch with neon indicator

10

4011/3_ _

DP switch with neon indicator and cord outlet

10

4014/3_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes

86mm x 86mm 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Cord outlet suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter.

32A DP CONTROL SWITCH

l

BS EN 60669-1 4011/BZ

4014/3SC

PACK QTY

DP switch with neon indicator Dimensions Mounting boxes

10

4012/3_ _

86mm x 86mm 9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Two earthing terminals are fitted to the switches.

DIMMER SWITCHES - FLUSH

l

PACK QTY

2400W/BZ

1

1250W/_ _

1 gang dimmer 400W

1

1400W/_ _

1 gang low voltage dimmer 400W

1

1400LV/_ _

2 gang dimmer 250W

1

2250W/_ _

2 gang dimmer 400W

1

2400W/_ _

3 gang dimmer 250W

1

3250W/_ _

4 gang dimmer 250W

1

4250W/_ _

Other options available, please Technical Services. Dimensions 1-2 gang 86mm x 86mm, 3-4 gang 146 x 86mm Mounting boxes 1-2 gang 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 3-4 gang 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

TOGGLE SWITCHES - FLUSH BS EN 60669-1

6141/SC

6142/BZ

l

PACK QTY

1 gang 10A 2 way

1

6141/_ _

2 gang 10A 2 way

1

6142/_ _

1 gang 20A 2 way

1

6151/_ _

1 gang 20A 2 way and Off

1

6125/_ _

2 gang 20A 2 way

1

6152/_ _

Other options available, See pages 49 & 51. Dimensions 1-2 gang 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 1-2 gang 9223/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E

1250W/HPC

1 gang dimmer 250W

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

35

All the following list numbers are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR), and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC). Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) is available made to order. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 8265 Co-axial socket in Bronze = 8265/BZ.

32A TP & N CONTROL SWITCH BS 3676 TYPE TESTED TO BS EN 60947-3

l

PACK QTY

TP & N switch with neon indicator

1

4515/_ _

16mm2 207mm x 146mm 9224/BG for flush mounting

Terminal capacity Dimensions Mounting box

See pages 9 & 55 for further details.

6AX TP CONTROL SWITCH

l

BS EN 60669-1 BS EN 60947-3

PACK QTY

6AX Three Pole Isolating switch

10

6017/_ _

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

4515/SC

For Technical details see page 107.

CO-AXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS BS 3041 WHERE APPLICABLE

8265/YR

8268/BZ

l

PACK QTY

1 way direct connection

10

8265/_ _

2 way direct connection

10

8266/_ _

1 way isolated UHF, VHF

1

8267/_ _

2 way isolated UHF, VHF

1

8268/_ _

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining Isolated units only suitable on installations with earth bond.

DATAPAK COMMUNICATIONS PLATES BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE

l

PACK QTY

1 module metal plate (fitted with grid)

5

8091/_ _

2 module metal plate (fitted with grid)

5

8092/_ _

4 module metal plate (fitted with grid)

5

8094/_ _

Dimensions

8092/BZ fitted with modules

8092/SC fitted with modules

86mm x 86mm, 1 & 2 module 86mm x 146mm, 4 module Mounting boxes 8091*, 8092*–9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 8094*–9040 surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining The metal plates listed above accept any of the Datapak range of modules. See page 71 for full product selection details.

TELEPHONE PLATES

l

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E

BS 7671

PACK QTY

Telephone master

10

8283/_ _

Telephone secondary

10

8284/_ _

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

8283/HPC

8284/SC

BLANKING PLATES

l

BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE 1 gang 2 gang Dimensions

6575/YR

PACK QTY 20

6575/_ _

20

6577/_ _

1 gang 86mm x 86mm 2 gang 146mm x 86mm

6577/BZ

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

36

All the following list numbers are available in Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR), and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC). Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) is available made to order. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 4522/3 Cooker switch in Bronze = 4522/3BZ.

45A DP SLIM LINE COOKER CONTROL UNIT BS 4177 & BS 1363 45A DP main switch and 13A switched socket outlet Faceplate marked ‘COOKER’ Dimensions Mounting boxes ● ● ● ●

4522/3BZ

l

PACK QTY 1

4522/3_ _

146mm x 86mm 9054 surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

Same plate size as standard twin socket. Large capacity tunnel terminals on live and neutral take up to 10mm2 cable. Two earth terminals are fitted. Separate double pole switching for both cooker and socket.

SHAVER SUPPLY UNIT

l

BS EN 61558

PACK QTY

240V 50Hz input 115V 50Hz output 230V 50Hz

1

2411/_ _

}

Dimensions Mounting boxes ●

86mm x 146mm 9053 surface, SB628 flush galv. or SB631 dry lining

Black or brown insert available made to order.

2411/SC

PRODUCT ENGRAVING SERVICE

l

A wide range of markings can be added to 13A fused connection units and double pole control switches. These popular markings are offered on a fast track service in red as standard. To order any of the markings listed below, add suffix to List No. ie 4316/SC engraved ‘emergency circuit’ = 4316/SC/EC. MARKING air conditioner 4832/3SC/EC

4832/BZ/HD

AC

MARKING

SUFFIX

MARKING

SUFFIX

heater

HT

security light

SL

bell transformer BE

hob

HB

shower

SH

cooker hood

HD

humidity vent

HV

shower pump

SP

daytime boost

DB

intruder alarm

IA

storage heater

ST

dishwasher

DW

microwave

MW

towel rail

TR

emergency circuit EC

night immersion NI

tumble dryer

TD

extractor fan

EF

oven

OV

washing machine WM

freezer

FZ

heater

PH

waste disposal

WD

fridge

FR

security alarm

SA

water cooler

WC

fridge freezer

FF

For price and delivery information on other markings not listed above, our Technical Services Department.

RED ROCKERS For applications where essential supply systems are in use, sockets and fused connection units with red rockers are available to order. These are ideal for use in hospitals, computer installations, etc. To order, add suffix to List No. ie 4316/SC with red rockers = 4316/SC/RD. For Rockergrid switches with red rockers see Rockergrid section page 48.

C A P I TA L M E TA L P L AT E

4837/3SC/ST

4832/3BZ/EF

SUFFIX

4316/SC/RD For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

37

38

DECORATIVE BRASS Crabtree’s Decorative Brass range is designed to complement its extensive ’Capital’ range. Polished and lacquered solid brass faceplates give a durable high quality finish. Also available in clam shell packaging for wholesale display.

Polished brass

Rope Edge Brass

C A P I TA L D E C O R AT I V E B R A S S 39

All the following list numbers are available in Polished Brass (PB) and Rope Edge (RB) finishes. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 4314 13A 1 gang switched socket in Rope Edge = 4314/RB. Products are also available with brown interiors. Add suffix BN to list no. ie 4314/RB 13A 1 gang switched socket in Rope Edge with brown interior = 4314/3RBBN. Clam shell packaging format available. Prefix list number with C. ie: C4314/RB.

13A FLUSH SOCKET OUTLETS

l

BS 1363

PACK QTY

1 gang SP switched

1

4314/_ _

2 gang SP switched

1

4316/_ _

1 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

1

4314/3_ _

2 gang SP switched fitted with neon indicator

1

4316/3_ _

Dimensions 4314/PBBN

4316/RB

PB 1 gang 86mm x 86mm RB 1 gang 94mm x 94mm 2 gang 146mm x 86mm 2 gang 154mm x 94mm Mounting boxes 1 gang 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 2 gang 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

Metal rocker versions are available to order - Add suffix 9 to List No. ie 4316/PB/9 Double pole versions are available to order - Add suffix D to List No. 4316/DPB

4314/3PB

4316/3RBBN

2A, 15A FLUSH SOCKET OUTLETS

l

PACK QTY 2A 3 pin unswitched

1

8075/_ _*

15A 3 pin switched

1

2372/_ _**

Dimensions PB 86mm x 86mm RB 94mm x 94mm Mounting boxes 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

C A P I TA L D E C O R AT I V E B R A S S

* Unshuttered version available for export only – Add suffix E to List No. ie 8075/PBE. ** Product available in white only 8075/PB

13A FLUSH FUSED CONNECTION UNITS BS 1363 DP switched

1

4832/_ _

DP switched with neon indicator

1

4832/3_ _

DP switched with cord outlet and neon indicator 1

4837/3_ _

Dimensions PB 86mm x 86mm RB 94mm x 94mm Mounting boxes 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 4832/PB

4837/3PB

4832/PB BN

4837/3RB

All fused connection units: Fused on the line side with 13A fuse link ASTA certified and marked to BS 1362. For spare fuse links see page 6. Cord outlet suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter. Two earthing terminals are fitted to the unit.

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

40

l

PACK QTY

All the following list numbers are available in Polished Brass (PB) and Rope Edge (RB) finishes. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 4011/3 Double pole switch in Rope Edge = 4011/3RB. Products are also available with brown interiors. Add suffix BN to list no. ie 4011/3 Double pole switch in Rope Edge with brown interior = 4011/3RBBN. Clam shell packaging format available. Prefix list number with C. ie: C4011/3RB.

10AX PLATE SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

1 gang 2 way

1

6170/_ _

2 gang 2 way

1

6172/_ _

3 gang 2 way

1

6173/_ _

1 gang Intermediate

1

6175/_ _

1

6096/_ _

1 gang retractive (press) 6170/PBBN

6172/RB

Dimensions Mounting boxes

PB 86mm x 86mm RB 94mm x 94mm 9043 surface, SB623 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Two way switches can be wired as one way. Fully rated for fluorescent or inductive loads. (Except 6096, 10A only) Retractive switch can be wired for normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) circuits.

6173/RBBN

20A DP CONTROL SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

20A DP control switch

1

4011/_ _

20A DP control switch with neon indicator

1

4011/3_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes

PB 86mm x 86mm RB 94mm x 94mm 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Two earthing terminals are fitted to the switches. Cord outlet suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter.

4011/3PB

l

BS EN 60669-1

PACK QTY

DP switch with neon indicator Dimensions Mounting boxes

1

4012/3_ _

PB 86mm x 86mm RB 94mm x 94mm 9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

Two earthing terminals are fitted to the switches.

4012/3RB

50A DP CONTROL SWITCHES BS EN 60669-1

l

PACK QTY

DP switch

1

4512/_ _

DP switch with neon indicator

1

4512/3_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes

PB 86mm x 146mm 9040 surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

BS EN 60947-3 rating 240V 50A category of duty AC22. For associated cable outlets see page 8. Available in Polished Brass only

C A P I TA L D E C O R AT I V E B R A S S

32A DP CONTROL SWITCH

4512/3PBBN For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

41

All the following list numbers are available in Polished Brass (PB) and Rope Edge (RB) finishes. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 2411 Shaver Supply Unit in Polished Brass = 2411/PB. Products are also available with brown interiors. Add suffix BN to list no. ie 2411 Shaver Supply Unit in Polished Brass with brown interior = 2411 /PBBN. Clam shell packaging format available. Prefix list number with C. ie: C2411/PB.

SHAVER SUPPLY UNIT

l

BS EN 61558

PACK QTY

240V 50Hz input 115V 50Hz output 230V 50Hz

1

2411/_ _

}

Dimensions Mounting boxes

PB 86mm x 146mm RB 94mm x 154mm 9053 surface, SB628 flush galv. or SB631 dry lining

Black or brown moulded insert available as made to order.

2411/PB

CO-AXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS BS 3041 WHERE APPLICABLE

l

PACK QTY

1 way direct connection

1

8265/_ _**

2 way direct connection

1

8266/_ _**

1 way isolated UHF, VHF

1

8267/_ _**

2 way isolated UHF, VHF

1

8268/_ _**

Dimensions PB 86mm x 86mm RB 94mm x 94mm Mounting boxes 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 8265/PB

8268/RB

Isolated units only suitable on installations with earth bond. Products marked ** are not available with black or brown interiors.

DIMMER SWITCHES

l

C A P I TA L D E C O R AT I V E B R A S S

PACK QTY

1250W/PB

2400W/RB

1 gang dimmer 250W

1

1250W/_ _

1 gang dimmer 400W

1

1400W/_ _

1 gang low voltage dimmer 400W

1

1400LV/_ _

1 gang dimmer 630W

1

1630W/_ _

2 gang dimmer 250W

1

2250W/_ _

2 gang dimmer 400W

1

2400W/_ _

3 gang dimmer 250W

1

3250W/_ _

4 gang dimmer 250W

1

4250W/_ _

Dimensions

1-2 gang PB 86mm x 86mm, RB 94mm x 94mm 3-4 gang PB 146mm x 86mm, RB 154mm x 94mm Mounting boxes 1-2 gang 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 3-4 gang 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining 1 gang 630W SB618 flush galv. or SB632 dry lining Other low voltage options available, please enquire for details.

TOGGLE SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1. 2000

1

6141/_ _

2 gang 10A 2 way

1

6142/_ _

1 gang 20A 2 way

1

6151/_ _

1 gang 20A 2 way and Off

1

6125/_ _

2 gang 20A 2 way

1

6152/_ _

Dimensions 6141/PB

6142/RB

PACK QTY

1 gang 10A 2 way

1-2 gang PB 86mm x 86mm, RB 94mm x 94mm

Mounting boxes 1-2 gang 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 3-4 gang 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining 1 gang 630W SB618 flush galv. or SB632 dry lining Other options available, See pages 49 & 51. For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

42

All the following list numbers are available in Polished Brass (PB) and Rope Edge (RB) finishes. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 8283 telephone single master socket outlet in Rope Edge = 8283/RB. Products are also available with brown interiors. Add suffix BN to list no. ie 8283 telephone single master socket outlet in Rope Edge with brown interior = 283/RBBN. Clam shell packaging format available. Prefix list number with C. ie: C8283/RB.

TELEPHONE SOCKET OUTLETS

l

PACK QTY Single master

1

8283/_ _

Single secondary

1

8284/_ _

Dimensions Mounting boxes

8283/PB

PB 86mm x 86mm RB 94mm x 94mm 9221/BG surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

8284/RBBN

BLANKING PLATES

l

BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE

PACK QTY

1 gang 2 gang Dimensions

6575/PB

1

6575/_ _

1

6577/_ _

PB 1 gang 86mm x 86mm, 2 gang 146mm x 86mm RB 1 gang 94mm x 94mm, 2 gang 154mm x 94mm

6577/RB

ROCKERGRID FLUSH PLATES

l

PACK QTY 1

6571/_ _

2 gang Rockergrid plate

1

6572/_ _

3 gang Rockergrid plate

1

6573/_ _

4 gang Rockergrid plate

1

6574/_ _

Dimensions

1-2 gang PB 86mm x 86mm, RB 94mm x 94mm 3-4 gang PB 146mm x 86mm, RB 154mm x 94mm

When ordering Rockergrid plates, please select the appropriate grid.

6572/RB fitted with Rockergrid switches

GRIDS

l

PACK QTY 1 gang grid

20

6901

2 gang grid

20

6902

3 gang grid

10

6903

10

6904

4 gang grid Dimensions

6901

6902

1-2 gang 81mm x 58mm 3-4 gang 141mm x 58mm

When required for surface mounting assemblies, the fixing ears should be removed or bent downwards at 90°. Complete with earth terminal. The Rockergrid plates and grids accept any of the range of Rockergrid switches. See page 48 & 49 for full product selection.

C A P I TA L D E C O R AT I V E B R A S S

1 gang Rockergrid plate

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

43

MODULAR SYSTEM

The New Crabtree Toggle Switch compliments the current Rockergrid range. A unique key (suppied) is required to lock the Toggle Switch in place.

Rockergrid provides the design versatility of a modular switch range whilst incorporating Capital styling and safety features which benefit the and installer alike.

44

Rope Edge Brass

Polished Brass

Satin Chrome

Highly Polished Chrome

Bronze

Oyster Gold

White

• Unique labyrinth switch design minimises visible arc flash and prevents front access to live parts. • Positive drive switch action prevents balancing between the ‘on’ and ‘off’ position and gives reliable indication of the position.

Birch Grey

• Silver alloy s for longer life and low resistance.

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM

Polished Stainless Steel

45

SELECTION TABLE

l

PLATES

Gang

1

2

3

4

6

8

9

12

BIRCH GREY Engraved ‘Water Heater’

6581/BG 6581/1BG

6582/BG 6582/1BG

6583/BG

6584/BG

6586/BG

6588/BG

6589/BG

6580/BG

BRONZE Engraved ‘Water Heater’

6561/BZ 6561/1BZ

6562/BZ 6562/1BZ

6563/BZ

6564/BZ

6566/BZ

6568/BZ

6569/BZ

6560/BZ

SATIN CHROME Engraved ‘Water Heater’

6561/SC 6561/1SC

6562/SC 6562/1SC

6563/SC

6564/SC

6566/SC

6568/SC

6569/SC

6560/SC

OYSTER GOLD Engraved ‘Water Heater’

6561/YR 6561/1YR

6562/YR 6562/1YR

6563/YR

6564/YR

6566/YR

6568/YR

6569/YR

6560/YR

5571

5572

5573

5574

5576

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE

Surface

46

Flush MOULDED WHITE WHITE METAL

6578/WH

6570/WH

BRONZE Engraved ‘Water Heater’

6571/BZ 6571/1BZ

6572/BZ 6572/1BZ

6573/BZ

6574/BZ

6576/BZ

6578/BZ

6579/BZ

6570/BZ

SATIN CHROME Engraved ‘Water Heater’

6571/SC 6571/1SC

6572/SC 6572/1SC

6573/SC

6574/SC

6576/SC

6578/SC

6579/SC

6570/SC

OYSTER GOLD Engraved ‘Water Heater’

6571/YR 6571/1YR

6572/YR 6572/1YR

6573/YR

6574/YR

6576/YR

6578/YR

6579/YR

6570/YR

HIGHLY POLISHED CHROME

6571/HPC

6572/HPC

6573/HPC

6574/HPC

6576/HPC

6578/HPC

6579/HPC

6570/HPC

POLISHED STAINLESS STEEL

6571/PSS

6572/PSS

6573/PSS

6574/PSS

6576/PSS

6578/PSS

6579/PSS

6570/PSS

POLISHED BRASS

6571/PB

6572/PB

6573/PB

6574/PB

6576/PB

6578/PB

6579/PB

6570/PB

ROPE EDGE BRASS

6571/RB

6572/RB

6573/RB

6574/RB

6901

6902

6903

6904

2 x 6903

2 x 6904

3 x 6903

3 x 6904

with knock-outs

9201/BG

9201/BG

9203/BG

9203/BG

9206/BG

9206/BG

9209/BG

9209/BG

without knock-outs

9201/PBG

9201/PBG

9203/PBG

9203/PBG

9206/PBG

9206/PBG

9209/PBG

9209/PBG

SB615

SB615

SB625

SB625

GRIDS

Flush or surface BOXES

Flush or surface

Flush only ASSEMBLY

1 Install box and enter cables.

2 Remove ‘ears’ from grid for surface installations.

3 Fix switches into grid.

● ●

Boxes, grids & switches common to flush & surface installations.

●

When Flush mounting do not remove ‘ears’. ●

Single screw switch fixing. Fingerproof shrouding around terminals.

* Metal rocker finishes: Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR), Polished Brass (PB), and Highly Polished Chrome (HPC). Architrave

18

6580/18BG

24

2

6580/24BG

6560/18BZ

6560/24BZ

6560/18SC

6560/24SC 6560/24YR

6570/18WH

6570/24WH

6591/WH 6592/WH

6570/18BZ

6570/24BZ

6591/BZ

6592/BZ

6570/18SC

6570/24SC

6591/SC

6592/SC

ROCKER

l

MOULDED

METAL

10AX 1 way

4430

4430/9_ _*

10AX 2 way

4530

4530/9_ _*

10AX Retractive

4489

4489/9_ _*

10AX Retractive marked with bell symbol

4490

4490/9_ _*

10AX Retractive 2 way and off

4553

4553/9_ _*

20A

1 way

4450

4450/9_ _*

20A

1 way key switch c / w key

4451

20A

2 way

4550

20A

2 way key switch c / w key

4551

20A

2 way and off

4552

4552/9_ _

20A

Intermediate

4535

4535/9_ _*

20A

Double pole

4460

4460/9_ _*

20A

Double pole marked ‘ON’

4469

4469/9_ _*

20A

Double pole key switch c / w key

4461

Switches are available in Brown (BN) and Black (BK) eg: 4460/BN, 4460/9PBBN

ACCESSORIES

l

Cord outlet

4435

13A fused connection unit

4436

6570/18YR

6570/24YR

6591/YR

Neon indicator (Red)

4491

6570/18HPC

6570/24HPC

6591/HPC 6592/HPC

Neon indicator (Green)

4493

6570/18PSS

6570/24PSS

6591/PSS

6592/PSS

Neon indicator (Amber)

4494

6592/PB

Socket outlet 2.5–16A

4499†

Blanking component

4492

Spare key

6940 (Metal)

6570/18PB

6570/24PB

6592/YR

6591/PB

4550/9_ _*

Accessories are available in Brown (BN) and Black (BK) eg: 4436/BK † Available for export use only.

3 x 6906

4 x 6906

9209/18BG

9209/24BG

Supplied fitted to architrave plate

Switch modules: ● Tough impact-resistant thermoplastic moulded construction. ● Metal plate switch modules incorporate double insulation. ● Suitable for mounting and OEM applications. ● IP66 protected Rockergrid switch enclosures are available, see Weatherseal section page 60.

9209/18PBG 9209/24PBG 9341/GV

9342/GV

4 Connect wires to relevant switches & earth terminals. ●

●

Large capacity, easy-to-wire terminals. Diagrammatic marking on rear of switch.

5 Fix wired switch/grid assembly into box.

6 Fix face plate onto grid.

● ●

Automatic grid alignment with horizontal adjustment.

Robust impact resistant construction, high quality moulded & metal parts.

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE

6560/18YR

1

SWITCHES

47

10AX SWITCHES – MOULDED ROCKER BS EN 60669-1

4430 4530

4490

1 way SP

10

4430

2 way SP

10

4530

Retractive

10

4489

Retractive – bell symbol

10

4490

Retractive 2 way and off

10

4553

Available as made to order in Brown (BN) or Black (BK) eg: 4530/BN Fully rated for fluorescent and inductive loads (except List No.4553). 4490 Retractive switch can be wired for normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) circuits. (except List No. 4553)

4530/BN

20A SWITCHES – MOULDED ROCKER BS EN 60669-1

4450 4460 4535 4550

4469

4552

4451 4551 4461

l

PACK QTY

6940

l

PACK QTY

1 way

10

4450

1 way complete with key

10

4451

DP

10

4460

Various markings - See page 51

10

4460/_ _

DP complete with key

10

4461

DP with key marked “Emergency Lighting Test”

10

4461/ELT

DP marked ‘ON’

10

4469

Intermediate

10

4535

2 way

10

4550

2 way complete with key

10

4551

2 way with key marked “Emergency Lighting Test” 10

4551/ELT

2 way and off

10

4552

Spare key

10

6940

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM

Available as made to order in Brown (BN) or Black (BK) eg: 4550/BN Fully rated for fluorescent and inductive loads (except List No.4552).

ACCESSORIES – MOULDED

4435

4436

4491

4492

4494

4499

l

BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE

PACK QTY

Dimmer module grid adaptor

10

4480

Cord outlet – 10mm diameter aperture, complete with earthing terminal and cable clamp 10

4435

Fuse unit fitted with 13A ASTA certified fuse link 10

4436

Indicator – Red

10

4491

Blanking component

10

4492

Indicator – Green

10

4493

Indicator – Amber

10

4494

Socket outlet 2.5–16A

10

4499*

Available as made to order in Brown (BN) or Black (BK) * Not for use inside the UK where IEE Regulations (BS 7671) are applicable.

OTHER SWITCH VARIATIONS

l

The following modules are available with brown or black mouldings to order.

4430

4491

4430/9_ _

4450

4493

4450/9_ _

4490

4550

4490/9_ _

Brown add /BN Black add /BK. Note 4530/9PBBN, 4460/9PBBN, 4550/9PBBN available as standard items.

4430/RD

4460/BN

4460/RD 4535/BN 4535/9PBBN

Red rockers

4430

4530

4450

4460

4550

4490

Add /RD to list number. For cut-out details see dimensions on page 124.

48

4535/9_ _

4535

All the following metal plate switches are available with Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR) High Polished Chrome (HPC) and Polished Brass (PB) rockers. Indicate the finish you require by adding the suffix to List No. eg 4430/9 with Bronze rocker = 4430/9BZ.

10AX SWITCHES – METAL PLATE ROCKER BS EN 60669-1

4430/9SC 4530/9SC

4430/9BZ 4530/9BZ 4490/9SC

1 way

10

4430/9_ _

Retractive

10

4489/9_ _

Retractive – bell symbol

10

4490/9_ _

2 way

10

4530/9_ _

Available as made to order in Brown (BN) or Black (BK) eg: 4530/9PBBN Fully rated for fluorescent and inductive loads. Retractive switches can be wired for normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) circuits.

4430/9PB 4530/9PB 4490/9BZ

4490/9PB

20A SWITCHES – METAL PLATE ROCKER BS EN 60669-1

4469/9SC 4450/9SC 4460/9SC 4535/9SC 4550/9SC

4469/9BZ 4450/9BZ 4460/9BZ 4535/9BZ 4550/9BZ

4450/9PB 4460/9PB 4535/9PB 4550/9PB

1 way

10

4450/9_ _

DP

10

4460/9_ _

DP marked ’ON‘

10

4469/9_ _

Intermediate

10

4535/9_ _

2 way

10

4550/9_ _

Available as made to order in Brown (BN) or Black (BK) eg: 4460/9SCBK Fully rated for fluorescent and inductive loads.

l

BS EN 60669-1

5550/BZ

PACK QTY

10AX 2 way Single Pole

5

5430/_ _

20A 2 way Single Pole

5

5550/_ _

20A 2 way and Off Single Pole

5

5552/_ _

One Fixing Key supplied per pack. For cut-out Dimensions, see page 125.

DIMMERS

l

PACK QTY 250W dimmer module

10

4425

400W dimmer module

10

4440

● ●

Dimmer modules come complete with grid adaptor (4480). Available early 2004.

4440

GRIDS

l

1 gang

20

6901

2 gang

20

6902

3 gang

10

6903

4 gang

10

6904

10

6906

6 gang Dimensions 6901

6902

1–2 gang 81mm x 58mm 3–4 gang 141mm x 58mm 6 gang 202mm x 58mm

When required for surface mounting assemblies, the fixing ears should be removed or bent inwards at 90°. Complete with earth terminal.

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM

5550/HPC 5550/PB

l

PACK QTY

TOGGLE SWITCH

5550/SC

l

PACK QTY

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

49

FLUSH MOULDED PLATES

l

PACK QTY 1 gang

20

5571

2 gang

20

5572

3 gang

10

5573

4 gang

10

5574

1

5576

1 gang

20

6571/_ _

1 gang faceplate engraved ‘water heater’

20

6571/1_ _

2 gang

20

6572/_ _

2 gang faceplate engraved ‘water heater’

20

6572/1_ _

3 gang

10

6573/_ _

4 gang

10

6574/_ _

6 gang

1

6576/_ _

8 gang

1

6578/_ _*

9 gang

1

6579/_ _

12 gang

1

6570/_ _*

18 gang

1

6570/18_ _*

24 gang

1

6570/24_ _*

1 gang architrave complete with grid

10

6591/_ _*

2 gang architrave complete with grid

10

6592/_ _*

6 gang 5571

5574

Dimensions

1–2 gang 86mm x 86mm 3–4 gang 146mm x 86mm 6 gang 147mm x 147mm

FLUSH METAL PLATES

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM

Dimensions

6592/SC

6570/24BZ

l

1–2 gang 86mm x 86mm 1–2 gang RB 94mm x 94mm 3–4 gang 146mm x 86mm 3–4 gang RB 154mm x 94mm 6–8 gang 147mm x 147mm

9–12 gang 147mm x 207mm 18 gang 207mm x 267mm 24 gang 207mm x 267mm 1 gang architrave 35mm x 86mm 2 gang architrave 35mm x 146mm

Add to List No. – BZ for Bronze finish, SC for Satin Chrome finish, YR for Oyster Gold finish, HPC for High Polished Chrome finish, PB for Polished Brass finish, PSS for Polished Stainless Steel finish. RB for Rope Edge Brass finish. RB not available in 6-24 gang or architrave. *Available in White Finish. Add WH to List No.

SURFACE METAL PLATES

l

PACK QTY

6561/SC

6563/BZ

1 gang

20

6561/_ _

1 gang faceplate engraved ‘water heater’

20

6561/1_ _

2 gang

20

6562/_ _

2 gang faceplate engraved ‘water heater’

20

6562/1_ _

3 gang

10

6563/_ _

4 gang

10

6564/_ _

6 gang

1

6566/_ _

8 gang

1

6568/_ _

9 gang

1

6569/_ _

12 gang

1

6560/_ _

18 gang

1

6560/18_ _

1

6560/24_ _

24 gang Dimensions

1–2 gang 77mm x 77mm 9–12 gang 137mm x 197mm 3–4 gang 137mm x 77mm 18 gang 197mm x 257mm 6–8 gang 137mm x 137mm 24 gang 197mm x 257mm

Add to List No. – BZ for Bronze finish, SC for Satin Chrome finish, PB for Polished Brass, YR for Oyster Gold finish, HPC for Highly Polished Chrome.

6568/SC

50

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112. For cut out detail, see dimensions on page 124.

TOGGLE SWITCH PLATES

l

PACK QTY 1 gang toggle switch plate

10

6551/_ _

2 gang toggle switch plate

10

6552/_ _

3 gang toggle switch plate

10

6553/_ _

4 gang toggle switch plate

10

6554/_ _

Dimensions 6551/SC

6552/BZ

1–2 gang 86mm x 86mm, 3-4 gang 146mm x 86mm

Add to List No. – BZ for Bronze finish, SC for Satin Chrome finish, PB for Polished Brass, YR for Oyster Gold finish, HPC for Highly Polished Chrome. For cut-out Dimensions, See page 125. For fully assembled units, see page 35 or 42.

SURFACE METALCLAD PLATES

l

PACK QTY

6581/BG

6580/BG

1 gang

20

6581/BG

1 gang faceplate engraved ‘water heater’

20

6581/1BG

2 gang

20

6582/BG

2 gang faceplate engraved ‘water heater’

20

6582/1BG

3 gang

10

6583/BG

4 gang

10

6584/BG

6 gang

1

6586/BG

8 gang

1

6588/BG

9 gang

1

6589/BG

12 gang

1

6580/BG

18 gang

1

6580/18BG

24 gang

1

6580/24BG

Dimensions 1–2 gang 77mm x 77mm 3–4 gang 137mm x 77mm 6–8 gang 137mm x 137mm

BOXES

l

3 and 4 gang surface or flush

5

9203/BG*

6 and 8 gang surface or flush

1

9206/BG*

9 and 12 gang surface or flush

1

9209/BG*

18 gang surface or flush

1

9209/18BG*

24 gang surface or flush

1

9209/24BG*

1 gang architrave flush only

10

9341/GV

2 gang architrave flush only

10

9342/GV

Dimensions 9201/BG 73mm x 73mm x 40mm 9203/BG 133mm x 73mm x 40mm 9206/BG 133mm x 133mm x 40mm 9209/BG 133mm x 194mm x 40mm 9209/BG

PACK QTY 10 9201/BG*

9209/18BG 194mm x 254mm x 56mm 9209/24BG 194mm x 254mm x 56mm 9341/GV 29mm x 72mm x 36mm 9342/GV 29mm x 133mm x 36mm

16mm knock-outs in 1 and 2 gang box and architrave boxes. 20mm and 25mm knock-outs in 3–24 gang boxes. Note: BG boxes fitted with earth terminal. Spare earth terminal (List No.6989) see page 69. * For boxes less knockouts list no. example 9201/PBG

20A DOUBLE POLE SWITCH MARKING “boiler” “dishwasher” “fridge” “fridge freezer” “heating system” “tumble dryer” “washer dryer” “water heater” 4460/HT 4460/WD

4460/EF

4460/WM 4460/HB

4460/BO 4460/DW 4460/FR 4460/FF 4460/HT 4460/TD 4460/WDR 4460/WA

“cooker hood” “extractor fan” “freezer” “hob” “microwave” “waste disposal” “washing machine”

l

4460/HD 4460/EF 4460/FZ 4460/HB 4460/MW 4460/WD 4460/WM

• Can be used with 13A fuse units to build bespoke kitchen/utility room control .

ROCKERGRID MODULAR SYSTEM

1 and 2 gang surface or flush

9201/BG

9–12 gang 137mm x 197mm 18 gang 197mm x 257mm 24 gang 197mm x 257mm

All of the above are supplied in pack quantities of 10. For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112. For cut out detail, see dimensions on page 124.

51

METALCLAD

• Tough durable finish which is resistant to premature ageing, discolouration and corrosion. • Finishing process is highly automated and controlled to ensure a consistent level of performance. • Production line tested for quality of gloss finish and uniform coverage of coating.

In tough conditions the sturdily built Capital metalclad range is ideal for use in industry, commerce and the home.

52

13A SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS BS 1363 1 gang SP

10

4214/BG

2 gang SP

5

4216/BG

1 gang SP with neon indicator

10

4214/3BG

2 gang SP with neon indicator

5

4216/3BG

Dimensions 4214/BG

4216/3BG

4214/3BG

4216/BG

l

PACK QTY

1 gang 82mm x 82mm x 44mm 2 gang 142mm x 82mm x 44mm

For sockets with plain boxes – Add suffix P to List No. eg 4216/BG with plain box = 4216/PBG. Double pole available to order – Add suffix D to List No. eg Double pole 4216/BG = 4216/DBG.

13A UNSWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS BS 1363

l

PACK QTY

1 gang unswitched

10

9685/BG

2 gang unswitched

5

9687/BG

Dimensions

1 gang 82mm x 82mm x 44mm 2 gang 142mm x 82mm x 44mm

For sockets with plain boxes – Add suffix P to List No. eg 4216/BG with plain box = 4216/PBG.

9685/BG

9687/BG

13A FUSED CONNECTION UNITS BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE

4846/BG

Unswitched

10

4841/BG

Unswitched with neon indicator

10

4841/3BG

DP switched

10

4842/BG

DP switched with neon indicator

10

4842/3BG

Unswitched with cord outlet

10

4846/BG

DP switched with cord outlet

10

4847/BG

DP switched with cord outlet and neon indicator

10

4847/3BG

Dimensions

82mm x 82mm x 44mm

For fused connection units with plain boxes – Add suffix P to List No. eg 4842/BG with plain box = 4842/PBG. Fused on the line side with a 13A fuse link ASTA certified and marked to BS 1362. For spare fuse links see page 6. Cord outlets suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter. Two earthing terminals are fitted to the unit.

4842/3BG

4847/3BG

C A P I TA L M E TA L C L A D

4841/BG

l

PACK QTY

For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

53

13A SAFETYSOCKET WITH RCD PROTECTION BS 7288 1 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current flush mounting 1 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current flush mounting 2 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current flush mounting 2 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current flush mounting 1 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current surface mounting 1 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current surface mounting 2 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current surface mounting 2 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current surface mounting

4414/A01BG

l

PACK QTY 1 4414/A01BG 1

4414/A03BG

1

4416/A01BG

1

4416/A03BG

1

4424/A01BG

1

4424/A03BG

1

4426/A01BG

1

4426/A03BG

Dimensions Flush –146mm x 86mm Surface –142mm x 82mm x 44mm Mounting boxes 4414 & 4416 series 9223/BG surface,SB665 flush galv or SB629 dry lining For boxes less knockouts see page 68. For further information see page 102. All available with two earth terminals to enable installation to comply with section 607 (wiring regulations) Add suffix /TE to List No.

4426/A03BG

5A, 15A SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS BS 546 5A shuttered SP 15A shuttered SP Dimensions

l

PACK QTY 10 2240/BG 10

2272/BG

82mm x 82mm x 44mm

For boxes less knockouts see page 68.

2240/BG

2272/BG

10AX SWITCHES

l

BS 3676 10AX 1 gang 2 way

PACK QTY 10 4581/BG

10AX 2 gang 2 way 10AX 3 gang 3 way Dimensions 4581/BG

10

4583/BG

4583/BG

l

BS 3676 DP Switch with neon indicator

C A P I TA L M E TA L C L A D

4582/BG

82mm x 82mm x 44mm

20A DP CONTROL SWITCHES

PACK QTY 10 4020/3BG

DP Switch with neon indicator and cord outlet Dimensions 4020/3BG

10

4021/3BG

10

82mm x 82mm x 44mm

Cord outlet suitable for flexible cord up to 10mm outside diameter. Surface box fitted with earth terminal. For switches with plain boxes add suffix P to List No. ie 4020/3BG with plain box = 4020/3PBG.

50A DP CONTROL SWITCHES

l

BS 3676 DP Switch

PACK QTY 10 4512/BG

DP Switch with neon indicator Dimensions

10

142mm x 82mm x 51mm

BS EN 60947-3 rating 240V 50A category of duty AC22.

4512/BG

4512/3BG For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

54

4021/3BG

4512/3BG

32A TP & N CONTROL SWITCHES BS 3676 TYPE TESTED TO BS EN 60947-3

l

PACK QTY

With neon indicator Unit accommodates up to 6mm2 cable

1

4513/BG

With neon indicator Unit accommodates up to16mm2 cable

1

4514/BG

Dimensions

4513/BG 142mm x 82mm x 51mm 4514/BG 173mm x 122mm x 74mm

Terminal capacity 16mm2 on all switches. Utilisation category to BS EN 60947-3: AC 22, 32A 415V. AC 23, 25A (12kW/16 HP max), 415V. See pages 9 & 36 for further details.

4513/BG

6AX TP CONTROL SWITCHES

l

BS EN 60669-1, BS EN60947-3

PACK QTY

6AX three pole isolating switch

10

4587/BG

Provides local isolation of fans with or without timers whilst the rest of the circuit remains live. Enables repair or routine maintenance of fans. 240V only.

Dimensions

82mm x 82mm x 44mm

For full details of compliance with BS EN 60947-3 see Technical Data page 107.

4513/BG

4514/BG

PRODUCT ENGRAVING SERVICE

l

A wide range of markings can be added to 13A fused connection units and double pole control switches. These popular markings are offered on a fast track service in red as standard. To order any of the markings listed below, add suffix to List No. ie 4216/BG engraved ‘emergency circuit’ = 4216/BGEC.

4842/BGEF

4842/BGWA

MARKING

SUFFIX MARKING

SUFFIX MARKING

SUFFIX

air conditioner

AC

heater

HT

security light

SL

bell transformer BE

hob

HB

shower

SH

cooker hood

HD

humidity vent

HV

shower pump

SP

daytime boost

DB

intruder alarm

A

storage heater

ST

dishwasher

DW

microwave

MW

towel rail

TR TD

night immersion N

tumble dryer

extractor fan

EF

oven

OV

washing machine WM

freezer

FZ

heater

PH

waste disposal

WD

fridge

FR

security alarm

SA

water cooler

WC

fridge freezer

FF

water heater

WA

For price and delivery information on other markings not listed above, our Technical Services Department.

RED ROCKERS For applications where essential supply systems are in use, sockets and fused connection units with red rockers are available to order. These are ideal for use in hospitals, computer installations, etc. To order, add suffix to List No. ie 4216/BG with red rockers = 4216/BG/RD.

4216/BG/RD

For Rockergrid switches with red rockers see Rockergrid section page 48.

BLANKING PLATES FOR SURFACE REPLACEMENT BOXES l PART NO

3899BG

PACK QTY

2 gang blank plate for list no 9214/BG

5

3809BG

1 gang blank plate for list no 9211/BG

10

3899BG

C A P I TA L M E TA L C L A D

emergency circuit EC

3809BG For full specification details of finishes see Technical Data page 112.

55

WATER & DUST PROTECTED

56

Crabtree’s new IP56 socket outlet is available as switched or unswitched and retains IP56 rating whilst in use.

Most items can be purchased complete with shallow enclosure, or in modular form for fitting separately in one to six gang enclosures in any combination.

Crabtree’s new IP66 20AX surface switch retains it’s full rating whilst in use.

W E AT H E R S E A L WAT E R & D U S T P R O T E C T E D

Water and dust protected to IP66, Weatherseal is ideal for all environments.

57

20A SURFACE SWITCHES

l

IP66

PACK QTY

1 gang 2 way 2 gang 2 way Dimensions

1

9664

1

9668

1 & 2 gang 103mm x 82mm x 68mm

Supplied as ready assembled units.

9664

9668

13A SURFACE SOCKET

l

BS 1363-2 IP56

PACK QTY

Single unswitched socket

1

9660

Single switched socket

1

9660/S

Twin unswitched socket (available 2004)

1

9660/2

Dimensions

1 gang 103mm x 82mm x 80mm 1 gang switched 162mm x 82mm x 80mm 2 gang 162mm x 120mm x 80mm

W E AT H E R S E A L WAT E R & D U S T P R O T E C T E D

The socket outlets retain their IP56 rating when used with any standard 13A plug.

9660

9660/S

Supplied as ready assembled units.

RCD PROTECTED 13A SOCKETS SOCKET BS 1363 RCD BS EN 61008

PACK QTY

40A 30mA RCD protecting one 13A socket

1

9571

40A 30mA RCD protecting two 13A sockets

1

9572

Dimensions

3 gang size 296mm x 102mm x 104mm 4 gang size 199mm x 199mm x 104mm

Sockets incorporate transparent flap which automatically snaps shut when the plug is withdrawn. Supplied as ready assembled units on appropriate enclosures. RCD terminals accept 25mm2 cable. RCD is Type AC operation. Type A available, see page 103. Will give BS 5490 IP66 protection when 9599 plug is used.

9571

9572

RCD PROTECTED 16A 240V SOCKET SOCKET BS 4343 RCD BS EN 61008 40A 30mA RCD protecting 16A 2P + E 240V splashproof socket

l

PACK QTY 1

9579

Supplied as ready assembled units on appropriate enclosures.RCD terminals accept 25mm2 cable. RCD is Type AC operation. Type A available, see page 103. Common to 110V and 240V BS 4343 splashproof sockets IP44 protection is maintained when plug is inserted. IP66 is maintained when cover flap is closed.

9579

Polycarbonate is a highly durable material which is ideal for use in most environments, however seek advice before installing in environments where chemicals or harsh cleaners are likely to be used. For IP ratings see Technical details on Page 106.

58

l

The individual switches and sockets listed on this page are supplied as ready assembled units on shallow enclosures. The switched socket combination unit is pre-wired and supplied as ready assembled units on appropriate enclosures.

10A SURFACE SWITCHES

l

BS 3676 BS 5490 IP66

PACK QTY

1 gang 1 way 2 gang 1 way Dimensions 9561

4

9561

2

9562

1 gang 101mm x 101mm x 76mm 2 gang 197mm x 101mm x 76mm

Padlock off facility provided. See page 100 for suitable padlock. Terminals accepted 2.5mm2 cable.

rear view

13A PLUGS, SURFACE SOCKETS & COMBINATION UNITS l 9599

PACK QTY Single socket outlet

4

9565

Switched socket combination

2

9567

Sleeved plug

9

9599

Dimensions

MODULAR SELECTION

Sockets incorporate transparent flap which automatically snaps shut when the plug is withdrawn. Terminals accept maximum 10mm2 cable. Will give BS 5490 IP66 protection when 9599 is used in combination with either 9565, 9565/L, 9567 or 9567/L. Plug ASTA approved by reference number 176.

9567

l

The popular items listed on the page opposite and above are in ready-assembled form. These can also be built up from separate modules to allow greater stock flexibility, whilst additional separate sale switch, socket and cover modules with enclosures up to 6 gang size enable the installer to provide high IP-rated combinations to suit individual applications.

9567 or 9567/L + 9562/ES

9566/E + 9569/L + 9561/2L + 9567/L + 9570/2 + 224/030 Multi-gang enclosures enable any combination

The table below lists the modular equivalents to the popular items supplied as ready assembled units.

READY-ASSEMBLED UNITS

MODULAR EQUIVALENT SELECTION

DESCRIPTION

LIST No

COVER MODULE(S)

ENCLOSURE

RCD

10A switch – 1 gang 1 way

9561

9561/1L

9561/ES

–

10A switch – 2 gang 1 way

9562

9561/1L x 2

9562/ES

–

13A single socket outlet

9565

9565/L

9561/ES

–

13A switched socket

9567

9567/L

9562/ES

–

13A single socket with 40A 30mA RCD

9571

9570/2 + 9565/L

9563/E

224/030

13A twin socket with 40A 30mA RCD

9572

9570/2 x 1 + 9565L x 2

9564/E

224/030

16A 2P + E 240V socket – BS 4343

9579

9570/2 + 9569/L

9563/E

224/030

The table below lists module selection details for some additional popular combinations.

DESCRIPTION

COVER MODULE(S)

ENCLOSURE

RCD

13A twin socket outlet with single switch

9565/L x 2 + 9561/DL

9563/E

–

13A twin-switched socket outlet

9567/L x 2

9564/E

–

13A single-switched socket with 40A 30mA RCD

9570/2 x 1 + 9567/L

9564/E

224/030

W E AT H E R S E A L WAT E R & D U S T P R O T E C T E D

9565

1 gang size 101mm x 101mm x 76mm 2 gang size 197mm x 101mm x 76mm

59

SOCKET MODULES

l

BS 4343

9569/L

9591/L

PACK QTY

16A 2P + E 240V splashproof socket

4

9569/L

16A 2P + E 110V splashproof socket

4

9591/L

16A 3P + E 415V splashproof socket

4

9592/L

16A 3PN + E 415V splashproof socket

4

9593/L

Should be assembled in deep enclosures. IP44 protection is maintained when plug is inserted, on 110V and 240V sockets. IP66 is maintained when plug is inserted, on 415V sockets.

9593/L

SWITCH MODULES

l

PACK QTY

9573/L

9561/2L

9573/RL

10A 1 way switch

4

9561/1L

10A 2 way switch

4

9561/2L

20A DP switch

4

9561/DL

32A TP switch

4

9573/L

32A TP switch – yellow/red

4

9573/RL

Can be assembled in shallow enclosures.

13A SOCKET MODULES

l

W E AT H E R S E A L WAT E R & D U S T P R O T E C T E D

PACK QTY 13A single unswitched socket

8

9565/L

13A switch/socket combination

2

9567/L

Can be assembled in shallow enclosures.

9565/L

9567/L

ROCKERGRID COVER MODULES 1 gang

4

9581/RG

2 gang

4

9582/RG

● ● ● ●

9581/RG

9582/RG

Suitable for any Rockergrid module. Rockergrid modules fix directly into moulded-in grid with single screw fixing. Enables a wide range of switch variations in IP66 rated enclosures. Can be used to provide 2 gang switching option where space is insufficient for standard Weatherseal module.

The selection table below lists some of the popular IP66 combinations which can be assembled from the Weatherseal and Rockergrid ranges.

MODULE SELECTION

l

ROCKERGRID module(s)

WEATHERSEAL cover module

WEATHERSEAL enclosure

10AX 2 gang 1 way switch – single module size

4430 x 2

9582/RG

9561/ES

10AX retractive switch

4489

9581/RG

9561/ES

13A switched FCU

4460 + 4436

9582/RG

9561/ES

13A unswitched FCU + neon

4436 + 4494

9582/RG

9561/ES

20A intermediate switch

4535

9581/RG

9561/ES

20A DP switch + neon

4460 + 4494

9582/RG

9561/ES

20A DP key switch

4461

9581/RG

9561/ES

20A 2 gang 1 way switch – single module size

4450 x 2

9582/RG

9561/ES

DESCRIPTION

Rear view

See page 48 for full range of Rockergrid switches.

60

l

PACK QTY

RCD COVER MODULE

l

PACK QTY 2 gang RCD cover with neon assembly and RCD mounting cradle

2

9570/2

Should be assembled in deep enclosures. ●

9570/2

Suitable for any 2 module RCD from the Lifestar range – see page 103.

RCD mounting cradle shown in deep enclosure

BLANK COVER MODULES

l

PACK QTY 1 gang blank cover

8

9561/L

2 gang blank cover

4

9562/L

3 gang blank cover

3

9563/L

9561/L

l

PACK QTY

9561/E

9562/ES

1 gang

4

9561/E

1 gang shallow

8

9561/ES

2 gang

2

9562/E

2 gang shallow

4

9562/ES

3 gang

3

9563/E

4 gang

1

9564/E

6 gang

1

9566/E

Dimensions (mm) H 1 gang enclosure 103 1 gang shallow enclosure 101 2 gang enclosure 198 2 gang shallow enclosure 197

x x x x

W 102 101 102 101

x x x x

D 63 40 63 40

H W 3 gang enclosure 296 x 102 x 4 gang enclosure 199 x 199 x 6 gang enclosure 296 x 199 x

SOCKET

REAR SIDE CONDUIT KNOCK-OUTS ENTRIES

9561/E

1x32/25

1x25, 1x32

1

1

–

–

9561, 9565 9561/ES

1x25/20

2x25

–

1

–

–

9562/E†

1x25, 1x32

1x25, 1x32

1

1

–

1

9562, 9567 9562/ES

2x25/20

2x25

–

1

–

1

9563/E*

2x25, 1x32

1x25, 1x32

1

1

–

2

9564/E*

2x25 1x32, 1x40

2x25, 4x32

1

1

2

2

9566/E*

2x25 2x32, 2x40

2x25, 4x32

1

1

4

3

D 63 63 63

32/25 25/20 REDUCER REDUCER DIVIDER BRIDGE

* Also supplied with 1 neutral & 1 earth connector. † Also supplied with 1 earth connector.

9566/E

To maintain IP66 rating, cover all fixing screws with caps provided. Seal bridge/divider slots with suitable silicon sealant – Dow Corning RTV-732. Check all conduit entry points are tight before use. Threaded conduit entries can be fitted to all popular metal and moulded metric conduit using a variety of proprietory adaptors (less locking ring), reducers, and adhesive where appropriate: eg for fitting 20mm moulded conduit to 9567 use Marshall-Tufflex MA8 adaptor (less locking ring), MR2 reducer and MSC2 sealing cement. Polycarbonate is a highly durable material which is ideal for use in most nvironments, however seek advice before installing in environments where chemicals or harsh cleaners are likely to be used.

W E AT H E R S E A L WAT E R & D U S T P R O T E C T E D

ENCLOSURES

61

INTERIORS & MOUNTING

Interiors and mounting products, which complement the extensive Capital, range, are available to suit many applications.The Capital range of Switched Sockets and Fused Control Units are available with metal capped rockers. Most Capital Products can also be supplied in brown as standard – ideal for brassware manufacturers.

62

13A SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS

4314/1BN

4316/1

l

1 gang SP

PACK QTY 10

4314/1

2 gang SP

5

4316/1

1 gang SP with provision for neon indicator

10

4314/13

2 gang SP with provision for neon indicator

5

4316/13

Brown mouldings also available – Add suffix BN to List No. Double pole switching also available to order – Add suffix D to List No. eg 4314/1 switched in Brown = 4314/1DBN Two earth terminals also available where compliance with section 607 (wiring regs) is required - add suffix /TE to list No. eg 4316/1/TE When specifying items with provision for neon indicators a lens, Part No.3711 and neon bulb, Part No.3713, are also required.

13A UNSWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS

l

1 gang unswitched

10

8255/1

2 gang unswitched

5

8257/1

1 gang round socket with side entry terminals and north/south fixings

10

7259

The 7259 mounting socket is suitable for use in any or trunking material up to 2.5mm thickness and can be incorporated into a minimum overall internal depth of only 22.5mm. Two earth terminals also available where compliance with section 607 (wiring regs) is required - add suffix /TE to list No. eg 8257/1/TE

8257/1

FUSED CONNECTION UNITS

4831/1

4832/1BN

l

13A unswitched

10

4831/1

13A DP switched

10

4832/1

13A DP switched with provision for neon indicator

10

4832/13

13A unswitched with cord outlet

10

4836/1

13A DP switched with cord outlet

10

4837/1

13A DP switched with cord outlet and provision for neon indicator

10

4837/13

Brown interiors also available – Add suffix BN to List No. When specifying items with provision for neon indicators a lens, Part No.3711 and neon bulb, Part No.3713, are also required.

13A SAFETYSOCKET WITH RCD PROTECTION BS 7288

4416/A103

l

PACK QTY

1 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4414/A101

1 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4414/A103

2 gang switched with neon indicator 10mA tripping current

1

4416/A101

2 gang switched with neon indicator 30mA tripping current

1

4416/A103

See page 102 for further information. Two earth terminals also available where compliance with section 607 (wiring regs) is required - add suffix /TE to list No. eg 4416/A103/TE

C A P I TA L I N T E R I O R S & PA N E L M O U N T I N G

8255/1

l

For cut-out details see page 123, 124 & 125.

63

METAL CAPPED ROCKERS 13A SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS

4314/19/_ _

2 gang SP

5

4316/19/_ _

1 gang SP with provision for neon indicator

10

4314/139/_ _

2 gang SP with provision for neon indicator

5

4316/139/_ _

1 gang SP

4314/19/SC

4316/19BN/PB

l

PACK QTY 10

Brown mouldings also available – Add suffix BN to List No. Double pole switching also available to order – Add suffix D to List No. eg 4314/1 switched in Brown = 4314/19DBN/SC Two earth terminals also available where compliance with section 607 (wiring regs) is required - add suffix /TE to list No. eg 4316/1/TE When specifying items with provision for neon indicators a lens, Part No.3711 and neon bulb, Part No.3713, are also required. Finishes available are: Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR) & Polished Brass (PB)

METAL CAPPED ROCKERS FUSED CONNECTION UNITS

l

C A P I TA L I N T E R I O R S & PA N E L M O U N T I N G

PACK QTY

4832/19/SC

4832/19BN/PB

13A DP switched

10

4832/19/_ _

13A DP switched with provision for neon indicator

10

4832/139/_ _

13A DP switched with cord outlet

10

4837/19/_ _

13A DP switched with cord outlet and provision for neon indicator

10

4837/139/_ _

Brown interiors also available – Add suffix BN to List No. When specifying items with provision for neon indicators a lens, Part No.3711 and neon bulb, Part No.3713, are also required. Finishes available are: Satin Chrome (SC), Bronze (BZ), Oyster Gold (YR) & Polished Brass (PB)

2A, 5A, 15A ROUND PIN SOCKET OUTLETS 5A shuttered SP

10

2240/1

15A shuttered SP

10

2272/1

2A 3 pin unswitched shuttered

10

8075/1*

* Brown mouldings also available – Add suffix BN to List No.

2272/1

2240/1

45A DP ‘SLIMLINE’ COOKER CONTROL UNITS

l

PACK QTY 45A DP main switch and 13A switch socket outlet

5

4522/1

45A DP main switch and 13A switch socket outlet with neon indicators

5

4522/13

Brown interiors also available – Add suffix BN to List No. When specifying units with neon indicators lenses, Part Nos.3467 & 3711 and a neon bulb, Part No.3713, are also required.

4522/1

For cut-out details see page 123, 124 & 125.

64

l

PACK QTY

10AX SWITCHES

l

PACK QTY

6170/1

6173/1BN

1 gang retractive marked ‘press’

10

6096/1

1 gang 2 way

10

6170/1

2 gang 2 way

10

6172/1

3 gang 2 way

10

6173/1

1 gang intermediate

10

6175/1

Interiors with Brown rockers available – Add suffix BN to List No.

20A/32A DP SWITCHES

l

PACK QTY 20A DP

4011/1

10

4011/1

20A DP with provision for neon indicator

10

4011/13

32A DP

10

4012/1

32A DP with provision for neon indicator

10

4012/13

Interiors with Brown rockers available – Add suffix BN to List No. When specifying items with provision for neon indicators a lens, Part No.3711 and neon bulb, Part No.3713, are also required.

4011/1BN

50A DP SWITCHES

l

50A DP

10

4512/1

50A DP with neon indicator

10

4512/13

Brown interiors also available – Add suffix BN to List No. When specifying the above items a mounting grid, Part No.2471, is also required. Grid fitted with earth terminal.

2471

4512/13BN

CO-AXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS

l

PACK QTY 1 way direct connection

1

8265/1

2 way direct connection

1

8266/1

1 way isolated VHF, UHF

1

8267/1

2 way isolated VHF, UHF

1

8268/1

Isolated units only suitable on installations with earth bond.

8265/1

8266/1

TELEPHONE OUTLETS

l

PACK QTY Master

10

8283/1

Secondary

10

8284/1

Brown interiors also available – Add suffix BN to List No. Supplied with loose earth terminal.

8283/1

8284/1BN

C A P I TA L I N T E R I O R S & PA N E L M O U N T I N G

PACK QTY

For cut-out details see pages 123,124 & 125.

65

INSTALLATION BOXES & SERVICE ITEMS

The comprehensive range of white moulded patresses offers a facility to surface mount Capital wiring accessories

66

SURFACE MOULDED BOXES FOR CAPITAL WIRING ACCESSORIES BS 5733

l

PACK QTY

20mm deep For Capital single gang moulded architrave 10 switches, will accept 16mm x 16mm mini-trunking

4005

Dimensions 33mm x 87mm x 20mm

For Capital double gang moulded architrave 10 switches, will accept 16mm x 16mm mini-trunking

4006

Dimensions 33mm x 147mm x 20mm

4005

34mm deep For 50A Capital switches and Rockergrid 3 and 4 gang moulded assemblies Fitted with cable clamp

4006

5

9040*

10

9041

Dimensions 87mm x 147mm x 34mm

44mm deep For 15A socket outlets, 32A DP switches and Rockergrid 1 and 2 gang moulded assemblies Dimensions 87mm x 87mm x 44mm

20mm deep With earth terminal 10 For 10AX Capital moulded and metalplate, Corinthian and Dimmer single gang size switches 9043

9048/1

9043

Dimensions 87mm x 87mm x 20mm

29mm deep Dual box for two single gang size accessories Fixed dividing barrier with knockouts

5

9044*

10

9047

5

9048*

5

9048/1*

Dimensions 174mm x 87mm x 29mm

For single gang size moulded accessories Dimensions 87mm x 87mm x 29mm

For double gang size moulded accessories Dimensions 147mm x 87mm x 29mm

With earth terminal For Capital 4 to 6 gang switches Dimensions 147mm x 87mm x 29mm

32mm deep Multipurpose box for single gang size accessories 5 9040

9053

9049*

Dimensions 88mm x 165mm x 32mm

Multipurpose box for double gang size accessories 2

9050*

Dimensions 148mm x 165mm x 32mm

1

9052*

5

9053*

5

9054*

5

9406

Dimensions 169mm x 115mm x 45mm

49mm deep For shaver supply unit Will accept 25mm x 16mm mini-trunking 9052

Dimensions 87mm x 147mm x 49mm

45mm deep For slimline cooker control units Will accept 25mm x 16mm mini-trunking Fitted with cable clamp Dimensions 89mm x 147mm x 45mm

20mm deep 2 gang Surface conversion patresses Converts 1 gang flush box to 2 gang surface Dimensions 147mm x 87mm x 20mm

* Can be secured to flush mounting steel boxes having 60.3mm accessory fitting centres

I N S TA L L AT I O N B O X E S

45mm deep For 45A cooker control units Fitted with cable clamp

9406

67

REPLACEMENT STEEL BOXES FOR CAPITAL SURFACE WIRING ACCESSORIES BS 5733

9211/BG

9214/BG

l

PACK QTY

43mm deep 20mm knockouts 10 Replacement box for 5, 13 and 15A single gang size surface accessories

9211/BG

As above less knockouts

10

9211/PBG

43mm deep 20mm knockouts Replacement box for 13A gang size surface accessories

5

9214/BG

As above less knockouts

5

9214/PBG

Dimensions 78mm x 78mm x 43mm

Dimensions 138mm x 78mm x 43mm

43mm deep 20mm knockouts 1 Replacement box for 4513 series of 32A TP & N switches Fitted with earth terminals and grid mounting pillars

9215/BG*

Dimensions 78mm x 138mm x 43mm

65mm deep 20mm knockouts 1 Replacement box for 4514 series of 32A TP & N switches Fitted with 2 earth terminals and grid mounting pillars

9224/BG*

Dimensions 118mm x 168mm x 65mm

* Boxes less knockouts available to order 9215/BG

9224/BG

SURFACE STEEL BOXES FOR CAPITAL FLUSH WIRING ACCESSORIES BS EN 60669-1

l

PACK QTY

36mm deep With 20mm knockouts For surface mounting single gang size flush accessories

10

9221/BG

As above less knockouts

10

9221/PBG

36mm deep With 20mm knockouts For surface mounting double gang size flush accessories

5

9223/BG

As above less knockouts

5

9223/PBG

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm x 36mm

9221/PBG

9223/BG

Dimensions 146mm x 86mm x 36mm When using these boxes to mount Rockergrid assemblies spacers should be used to ensure correct depth alignment of grid. See List No.1250 on page 69.

I N S TA L L AT I O N B O X E S

SURFACE STEEL PEDESTAL UNITS Single sided 1 gang

LPU1

LPU2

1

LPU1

Double sided 1 gang

1

LPUD1

Single sided dual 1 gang

1

LPU2

Double sided dual 1 gang

1

LPUD2

Single sided 2 gang

1

LPU2TA

Double sided 2 gang

1

LPUD2TA

Dimensions Single sided 1 gang 115mm x 100mm x 90mm Single sided dual 1 gang 115mm x 192mm x 90mm Single sided 2 gang 115mm x 160mm x 90mm Double sided 1 gang 115mm x 100mm x 148mm Double sided dual 1 gang 115mm x 192mm x 148mm Double sided 2 gang 115mm x 160mm x 148mm ● ● ●

LPUD2

● ●

68

l

PACK QTY

Bases recessed 12.7mm. Fixing centres 60.3mm. Bases fitted with 1 x 20mm conduit clearance hole (25mm on double-sided). Finished in grey epoxy polyester. Dividing fillets and alternative conduit entries available to order.

ACCESSORY FIXING SCREWS M3.5mm

l

PACK QTY 735010/BZ/VR

735011/SC/VR

735011/BZ

20mm long (vandal resistant)

100

735009/*/VR

25mm long (vandal resistant)

100

735010/*/VR

30mm long (vandal resistant)

100

735011/*/VR

25mm long

735010*

20mm long

100

735032

30mm long

735011*

23mm long

100

735038

50mm long

735012*

25mm long

100

735033

40mm long

735013*

30mm long

100

735023

* Add finish required i.e.735010SC.

735007/ZP

735008/SC

SUNDRY SCREWS & SPACERS

l

PACK QTY

706097

705094/BZ

15485–2/L/4

15244/PB

1250

Rockergrid switch to grid

100

706097

Capital 50A switch to grid & grid to box 4950/BG series

100

735006/ZP

Rockergrid grid to box

100

735007/ZP

Capital plate to box on 4214 & 4216 ranges

100

735008/*

Rockergrid plate to grid

100

705094/*

Rockergrid plate to grid (vandal-resistant)

100

705094/*/VR

Diamond grid to box

100

15485–2/L/4

Diamond plate to grid

100

15244*

Spacer for surface mounting Rockergrid switches on moulded pattress List No.9040 & surface steel boxes List Nos.9221/BG and 9223/BG

100

1250

1

6913

Screwdriver for Rockergrid VR screws

*All screws are available to match the appropriate Capital and Diamond metal plate finishes – see product section.

CAPITAL CEILING SWITCH ACCESSORY ITEMS

7410/WH

6900/1WH

6900

2m long red pull cord and acorn

6900/1RD

2m long white pull cord with red acorn

6900/1WH

100m ball of white pull cord

6900/2

100m ball of red pull cord

6900/2RD

Ceiling switch acorn red

7410/RD

Ceiling switch acorn white

7410/WH

CAPITAL NEON INDICATORS

7697

3713

6509

For 13A moulded & metal plate sockets, 13A fuse connection units, 20A, 32A, 45A capital switches

3713

For 13A safetysockets & slimline cooker control units

100215

For all 50A DP switches & large plate cooker control unit

7695

For 50A ceiling switch

7697

CAPITAL NEON LENSES

4674

3711

3467

l

For all 50A DP switches & large plate cooker control unit (larger lens) & 32A TP & N switches

3467

For 13A moulded & metal plate sockets, fuse connection units, 20A capital switches & slimline cooker control unit (smaller lens)

3711

For slimline cooker control unit (large lens) & capital 45A switches

3767

For 50A ceiling switch & large plate cooker control unit (smaller lens)

4674

SPARE EARTH TERMINALS 6988

6989

l

For 32A TP & N switches (4514, 4513 & 4515 series)

l

Brass (for use with 4 lug metal box)

100

6988

Brass

100

6989

CRABTREE SERVICE ITEMS

7410/RD

l

1.5m long white pull cord and acorn

66 69

Consisting of patch s, patch leads and a wide variety of Communications, Data and co-axial outlets, the new Crabtree Datapak range compliments the complete Capital and Platinum range of products.

70

COMMUNICATION MODULES

l

PACK QTY

7080

7071

7172

BT master voice

25

7080

BT master voice, left handed

25

7080/LH

BT secondary voice, 6 wire

25

7071

RJ45 (single) module, 8 wire – category 5e

25

7172

RJ45 ISDN terminated

25

7174

RJ11/12

25

7086

PABX voice

25

7176

RJ45 (twin) module

25

7173

Dimensions 25mm x 50mm (1 Module) All RJ45 modules are configured to wiring standard 258 A.

7176

7086

7174

DATA AND CO-AXIAL MODULES

l

PACK QTY

7069

7065

7067

BNC single module with 75 Ohm crimp connector

25

7074

TV outlet (male)

25

7065

TV outlet (female)

25

7067

F type satellite

25

7069

Triplex unit (TV, FM, Sat)

25

7063

TV outlet screened, return

25

7060

Phono (Female)

25

7087

Dimensions 25mm x 50mm (1 Module) (except 7063 – 50mm x 50mm)

7074

7063

7087

BLANK MODULES & ACCESSORIES

l

PACK QTY 1/2

module size

7081/2

1 module size

25

7081

IDC tool

20

6915

IDC crimp tool

1

7915

Dimensions 7081/2 12.5mm x 50mm 7081 25mm x 50mm 7081/2

7081

D ATA PA K

25

Also available in Black - Add suffix BK to list No ie triplex unit.in black = 7063/BK See page 111 for Technical details.

71

MOUNTING PLATES – CAPITAL

l

BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE

7091

7094

PACK QTY

2 module moulded

10

7091

4 module moulded

10

7094

1 module metal plate (fitted with grid)

5

8091/_ _

2 module metal plate (fitted with grid)

5

8092/_ _

4 module metal plate (fitted with grid)

5

8094/_ _

Dimensions

86mm x 86mm, 1 & 2 module 86mm x 146mm, 4 module Mounting boxes 7090, 7091, 8091*, 8092*, 9041 surface, SB615 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining 7094, 8094*, 9040 surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

* Metal plates complete with mounting grid and available in Satin Chrome (SC), * Bronze (BZ), Highly Polished Chrome (HPC) and Oyster Gold (YR) finishes. Indicate the finish you require by adding suffix to List No. ie 8091 – 1 module metal plate Bronze = 8091/BZ.

8091/BZ

8094/YR

MOUNTING GRIDS – SEPARATE SALE

l

PACK QTY

8092/1

8091/1

1 module grid

10

8091/1

2 module grid

10

8092/1

4 module grid

10

8094/1

Separate sale grids enable communications modules to be mounted in OEMs own decorative plates. Supplied complete with earthing tag.

MOUNTING PLATES – PLATINUM LOW PROFILE BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE 2 module 4 module Dimensions

l

PACK QTY 10

7507/_ _

10

7509/_ _

2 module 88mm x 88mm, 4 module 88mm x 148mm

Finishes available are: Satin Chrome (SC) Highly Polished Chrome (HPC) & Polished Brass (PB).

7507/SC 7509/HPC shown fitted with mounting grid

MOUNTING PLATES – PLATINUM FLAT PLATE BS 5733 WHERE APPLICABLE 2 module 4 module Dimensions

l

PACK QTY 10

8507/_ _

10

8509/_ _

2 module 86mm x 86mm, 4 module 86mm x 146mm

Finishes available are: Stainless Steel (SS) Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) & Polished Brass (PB).

8507/PB 8509/SS shown fitted with mounting grid

D ATA PA K

MOUNTING GRIDS – PLATINUM

72

l

PACK QTY 2 module

10

1091/1

4 module

10

1092/1

Supplied complete with earth terminal.

1091/1

1092/1

CO-AXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS

l

BS 3041 WHERE APPLICABLE 1 way direct connection 2 way direct connection 1 way isolated UHF, VHF 2 way isolated UHF, VHF 1 way F type Satellite 2 way F type Satellite Twin TV/ Satellite

PACK QTY 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

7265 7266 7267 7268 7269 7270 7271

Dimensions 86mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining

7265

7266

Isolated UHF, VHF socket outlets for network systems (group aerials & sockets). Isolated units only suitable on installations with earth bond.

TELEPHONE SOCKET OUTLETS

l

PACK QTY 20 10 10 10 10

IDC tool Single master Single secondary RJ11 Telephone socket Dual outlet adaptor Dimensions

6915 7283 7284 7286 7288

86mm x 86mm

Mounting boxes 9047 surface, SB655 flush galv. or SB619 dry lining BT approved by the Department for Trade and Industry.

7283 7284

7284 rear view

7288

PATCH S

l

PACK QTY

7348 7324

18 port, 1u Cat5e UTP

1

7318

24 port, 1u Cat5e UTP

1

7324

48 port, 1u Cat5e UTP

1

7348

4 ring cable tidy, 1u

1

7305

7318 7305

PATCH LEADS - RJ45 to RJ45 CAT 5e

l

PACK QTY 1

7501/2

1 metre

1

7501

2 metre

1

7502

3 metre

1

7503

5 metre

1

7505

Grey is standard lead colour. Other colours available are: Black (BK), Yellow (YW), Red (RD), Blue (BL) and Green (GN).

7501/2/BL

7502/BK

7505

D ATA PA K

0.5 metre

For Technical information see page 111. For Dimensions see page 126.

73

Luminaire Couplers Crabtree LSCs, provide flexibility and versatility to meet the demands of many domestic, commercial and industrial lighting applications. The range conforms to BS 7001 and BS 5733 and provides an effective plug-in connection with arrangements including 3, 4, 5 and 7 pin versions.

Ceiling assembly cover secures to outlet with assembly offering either standard or safety lampholder options

74

Ceiling outlet can be easily assembled to pattress and plug provides a simple plug in connection

CEILING ASSEMBLIES

5001 complete assembly

Description 3 pin 3 pin with 2m 3 pin with 2m 3 pin with 3m 3 pin with 3m 3 pin with 5m 3 pin with 5m

1.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.0mm2 1.0mm2

l

Heat Resistant (HR) cable Low Smoke (LSF) cable Heat Resistant (HR) cable Low Smoke (LSF) cable Heat Resistant (HR) cable Low Smoke (LSF) cable

4 pin 4 pin with 2m 1.0mm2 Heat Resistant (HR) cable 4 pin with 2m 1.0mm2 Low Smoke (LSF) cable 4 pin with 3m 1.0mm2 Heat Resistant (HR) cable 4 pin with 3m 1.0mm2 Low Smoke (LSF) cable 4 pin with 5m 1.0mm2 Heat Resistant (HR) cable 4 pin with 5m 1.0mm2 Low Smoke (LSF) cable Cover only for LSC ceiling assembly

5002

List No 5001 5002 5017 5002/3 5017/3 5002/5 5017/5 5009 5018 5019 5018/3 5019/3 5018/5 5019/5 5001/CVR

• Ceiling assemblies supplied as outlet, LSC plug and cover. • Other lengths and cable options available upon request.

CEILING OUTLETS & INTERIORS l

5011

List No

3 pin ceiling outlet

5003

4 pin ceiling outlet

5011

3 pin interior

5004

4 pin interior

5012

5 pin interior

5013

7 pin interior

5015

• For further details on 5 and 7 pin interiors see Technical page 111. • Interiors are installed into Crabtree Luminaire Distribution Boxes, LDBs.

5004

5012

5013

LSC PLUGS

5010

5006

l

Description

List No

3 pin

5006

4 pin (with red cover)

5010

5 pin

5014

7 pin

5016

• Cable clamp to grip outer cable insulation for maximum . • 4 pin LSC plug has a red cover as standard. • Prewired versions are available, please Technical Services.

PENDANT SETS

l

Description

List No

3 pin assembly with 6” flex and Standard Pendant

5007

3 pin assembly with 6” flex and Safety Pendant

5008

Surface mounting pattress

5005

5008

CRABTREE LUMINAIRE COUPLERS

5003

Description

For further details of pattress see Technical page 111.

75

Luminaire Distribution Boxes LSC Interiors are mounted in a combination of 6, 8 and 10 outlet configurations contained within a steel fabricated enclosure to provide a Luminaire Distribution Box, LDB. ●

Internal connections are made to a terminal block for ease of wiring ●

Sufficient side and rear knockouts allow entries for cable or conduit ●

76

Raised mounting feet allow for installation on uneven surfaces

3 PIN LUMINAIRE DISTRIBUTION BOXES

l

Description

List No

3 pin 6 way

5020/3

3 pin 8 way

5021/3

3 pin 10 way

5022/3

5022/3

4 PIN LUMINAIRE DISTRIBUTION BOXES

l

Description

List No

4 pin 6 way

5020/4

4 pin 8 way

5021/4

4 pin 10 way

5022/4

5020/4

5 PIN LUMINAIRE DISTRIBUTION BOXES

l

List No

5 pin 6 way

5020/5

5 pin 8 way

5021/5

5 pin 10 way

5022/5

5021/5

7 PIN LUMINAIRE DISTRIBUTION BOXES

l

Description

List No

7 pin 6 way

5020/7

7 pin 8 way

5021/7

7 pin 10 way

5022/7

Other configurations of LDB are available upon request. For further details or quotation please our Technical Services on 01543 455200.

5020/7

LSC PLUGS

5010

5006

l

Description

List No

3 pin

5006

3 pin C/W 2m HR cable

5006/2

3 pin C/W 3m HR cable

5006/3

3 pin C/W 4m HR cable

5006/4

4 pin (with red cover)

5010

4 pin C/W 2m HR cable

5010/2

4 pin C/W 3m HR cable

5010/3

4 pin C/W 4m HR cable

5010/4

5 pin

5014

7 pin

5016

• • • •

Cable clamp to grip outer cable insulation for maximum . 4 pin LSC plug has a red cover as standard. 3 pin LSC plugs can be installed into all LSC interiors. Different lengths & types of cable are available please Technical Services.

CRABTREE LUMINAIRE DISTRIBUTION BOXES

Description

For Dimensions see page 126.

77

78

WARWICK PVC modular trunking range which can be mounted at either Dado or Skirting level, available in 2 different sizes (50mm x 170mm) or (50mm x 212mm) they can be purchased as a standard system for hard wiring or with a 63Amp bus-bar system fitted to the centre compartment of the trunking.

WA RW I C K M O D U L A R P V C R A N G E 79

QUICK GUIDE TO FIVE PVC PROFILES WARWICK 2

WARWICK 3

WARWICK 4

WARWICK 5

Ref No

Ref No

Ref No

Ref No

Ref No

Trunking Pack

BCL1

BCL2

BCL3

BCL4

BCL5

Internal Bend

BCL1/IB

BCL2/IB

BCL3/IB

BCL4/IB

BCL5/IB

External Bend

BCL1/EB

BCL2/EB

BCL3/EB

BCL4/EB

BCL5/EB

Flat Angle 90° (Downward)

BCL1/FAD

BCL2/FAD

BCL3/FAD

BCL4/FAD

BCL5/FAD

–

BCL2/FAU

–

BCL4/FAU

BCL5/FAU

BCL1/FTD

BCL2/FTD

BCL3/FTD

BCL4/FTD

BCL5/FTD

–

BCL2/FTU

–

BCL4/FTU

BCL5/FTU

BCL1/SEL

BCL2/SEL

BCL3/SEL

BCL4/SEL

BCL5/SEL

–

BCL2/SER

–

BCL4/SER

BCL5/SER

Coupler Pack

BCL1/

BCL2/

BCL3/

BCL4/

BCL5/

Angled Cable Retainer

BCL/ACR

BCL/ACR

–

BCL/ACR

–

Standard Cable Retainer

BCL/SCR

BCL/SCR

BCL/SCR

BCL/SCR

BCL/SCR

BCL/SQCR

BCL/SQCR

BCL/SQCR

BCL/SQCR

Flat Angle 90° (Upward) Flat Tee (Downward) Flat Tee (Upward) Stop End - Left Stop End - Right

Square Cable Retainer

AN I TCE M WA RW I C K M OCDIUL L A R YP V R SA NAGNED S PA R E S

WARWICK 1

–

Single Gang Accessory Box

BCL/SGB

BCL/SGB

BCL/SGB

BCL/SGB

BCL/SGB

Twin Gang Accessory Box

BCL/TGB

BCL/TGB

BCL/TGB

BCL/TGB

BCL/TGB

ANGLED COVER SECTION Pack Quantity 5 x 3m BCL/ACS

MAIN COVER Pack Quantity 5 x 3m

BASE EXTENSION Pack Quantity 5 x 3m

VERTICAL MOUNT ADAPTOR PLATE Pack Quantity 1 BCL/ADPL

BCL/BE

METAL SCREENING Should metal screening be required, aluminium sections can be supplied for both top and bottom sections of the trunking to ensure “spiking” does not occur. If screened data/telephone cables are being used within the wiring system internal metal screening is not needed. For Technical information see page 113. Dimensions see page

80

BCL/MC

SQUARE COVER SECTION Pack Quantity 5 x 3m BCL/SCS

RCD HOUSING Pack Quantity 1

ANGLED SECTION SCREEN

BCL/RCD

BCL/ASS

Supplied in 1m lengths SQUARE SECTION SCREEN

BCL/SSS

Supplied in 1m lengths The above metal screen sections are suitable for profiles 1,2 & 3

Profile assembly includes: • Base Section • 2 x Angled Covers

42 mm

50 mm

• 1 x Main Cover

42 mm

85 mm

170 mm

Overall Size: • 170mm x 50mm

TRUNKING PACK Pack Quantity 1 x 3m length

BCL1

BCL1/IB

EXTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

BCL1/EB

FLAT ANGLE Pack Quantity 1

BCL1/FAD

FLAT TEE Pack Quantity 1

BCL1/FTD

STOP END Pack Quantity 1

BCL1/SEL

COUPLER PACK Pack Quantity 1

BCL1/

ANGLED CABLE RETAINER Pack Quantity 10 BCL/ACR

SINGLE GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SGB

TWIN GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 5 BCL/TGB

WA RW I C K 1 P V C T R U N K I N G

INTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

For Technical information see page 113. Dimensions see page

81

Profile assembly includes: • Base Section • 1 x Angled Cover

42 mm

50 mm

• 1 x Main Cover

85 mm

Overall Size: • 170mm x 50mm

WA ARRW WIICCK K M 2 OP D VC I N RGA N G E W U LTARRU N P VKC

42 mm

170 mm

• 1 x Square Cover

TRUNKING PACK Pack Quantity 1 x 3m length

INTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

BCL2/IB

EXTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

BCL2/EB

FLAT ANGLE (DOWNWARD) Pack Quantity 1 BCL2/FAD

FLAT ANGLE (UPWARD) Pack Quantity 1

BCL2/FAU

FLAT TEE (UPWARD) Pack Quantity 1

BCL2/FTU

FLAT TEE (DOWNWARD) Pack Quantity 1 BCL2/FTD

STOP END (LEFT) Pack Quantity 1

BCL2/SEL

STOP END (RIGHT) Pack Quantity 1

BCL2/SER

COUPLER PACK Pack Quantity 1

ANGLED CABLE RETAINER Pack Quantity 10 BCL/ACR

BCL2/

SQUARE CABLE RETAINER Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SQCR

SINGLE GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SGB

For Technical information see page 113. Dimensions see page

82

BCL2

TWIN GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 5 BCL/TGB

50 mm

Profile assembly includes: • Base Section 42 mm

• 2 x Square Covers • 1 x Main Cover

85 mm 42 mm

170 mm

Overall Size: • 170mm x 50mm

TRUNKING PACK Pack Quantity 1 x 3m length

BCL3

BCL3/IB

EXTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

BCL3/EB

FLAT ANGLE Pack Quantity 1

BCL3/FAD

FLAT TEE Pack Quantity 1

BCL3/FTD

STOP END Pack Quantity 1

BCL3/SEL

COUPLER PACK Pack Quantity 1

BCL3/

SQUARE CABLE RETAINER Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SQCR

SINGLE GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SGB

TWIN GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 5 BCL/TGB

WA RW I C K 3 P V C T R U N K I N G

INTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity

For Technical information see page 113. Dimensions see page

83

50 mm 42 mm

Profile assembly includes: • Base Section • 1 x Base Extension

85 mm

• 2 x Main Covers Overall Size: • 212mm x 50mm

85 mm

212 mm

• 1 x Angled Cover

4O PV I NR GA N G E WA RW I C K M DC U LTARRU N P VKC

TRUNKING PACK Pack Quantity 1 x 3m length

INTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

BCL4/IB

EXTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

FLAT ANGLE (UPWARD) Pack Quantity 1

BCL4/FAU

FLAT TEE (DOWNWARD) Pack Quantity 1 BCL4/FTD

FLAT TEE (UPWARD) Pack Quantity 1

BCL4/FTU

STOP END (LEFT) Pack Quantity 1

BCL4/SEL

STOP END (RIGHT) Pack Quantity 1

COUPLER PACK Pack Quantity 1

BCL4/

ANGLED CABLE RETAINER Pack Quantity 10 BCL/ACR

BCL4/EB

BCL4/SER

SINGLE GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SGB

For Technical information see page 113. Dimensions see page

84

BCL4

FLAT ANGLE (DOWNWARD) Pack Quantity 1 BCL4/FAD

TWIN GANG ACCESSORY BOX Pack Quantity 5 BCL/TGB

50 mm 42 mm

Profile assembly includes: • Base Section • 1 x Base Extension

85 mm

• 2 x Main Covers Overall Size: • 212mm x 50mm

85 mm

212 mm

• 1 x Square Cover

TRUNKING PACK Pack Quantity 1 x 3m length

BCL5

BCL5/IB

EXTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

FLAT ANGLE (UPWARD) Pack Quantity 1

BCL5/FAU

FLAT TEE (DOWNWARD) Pack Quantity 1 BCL5/FTD

FLAT TEE (UPWARD) Pack Quantity 1

BCL5/FTU

STOP END (LEFT) Pack Quantity 1

BCL5/SEL

STOP END (RIGHT) Pack Quantity 1

COUPLER PACK Pack Quantity 1

BCL5/

SQUARE CABLE RETAINER Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SQCR

BCL5/EB

BCL5/SER

SINGLE GANG ACCESSORY BOX 30mm Deep Pack Quantity 10 BCL/SGB

FLAT ANGLE (DOWNWARD) Pack Quantity 1 BCL5/FAD

TWIN GANG ACCESSORY BOX 30mm Deep Pack Quantity 5 BCL/TGB

WA RW I C K 5 P V C T R U N K I N G

INTERNAL BEND Pack Quantity 1

For Technical information see page 113. Dimensions see page

85

1

4

1

Bus-Bar Assembly

2

Bus-Bar Cover

3

Connector Block

4

Corner Assembly

5

Single Gang Accessory Box

2

3 5

WA RW I C K B U S - B A R T R U N K I N G

Bus-Bar lengths are supplied separately to allow flexibility on site, and can be ordered in varying lengths to suit the installation. The Bus-Bar Assembly will fit into any Warwick PVC profile. BCL/BB3

1 metre length

BCL/BB1

0.5 metre length

BCL/BB05

For installations requiring Bus-Bar, we strongly recommend the order is handled by the PROJECT SALES TEAM who offer a free installation design service.

• The Warwick Bus-Bar has been designed to fit into any of the five standard Warwick PVC trunkings. • Available with a full range of accessories for easy installation. • Single and double plug-in accessory boxes which locate into the Bus-Bar track and allow cable termination to standard 13A sockets. • Safety Bus-Bar cover

86

3 metre length

• Fully integrated system • WARWICK standard trunkings can be upgraded to a Bus-Bar system utilising full range of separate parts. • The Bus-Bar has a standard configuration with 4 bars - Live, Neutral, Earth and a separate bar for a clean Earth requirement and Regulation 607. The bars are clearly marked on the connector blocks and the snap-in boxes. A standard 3-bar system can be achieved if required.

Bus-Bar Assembly fitted into Warwick Trunking

BUS-BAR ASSEMBLY Bus-Bar Assembly 0.5m BCL/BB05

END STOP (LEFT) Standard Pack 1 BCL/BBSL

Bus-Bar Assembly 1m BCL/BB1

END STOP (RIGHT) Standard Pack 1 BCL/BBSR

Bus-Bar Assembly 3m BCL/BB3

CORNER ASSEMBLY Cable size 16mm2 400mm Cable Length Standard Pack 1

BCL/BBCA

SINGLE GANG ACCESSORY BOX Standard Pack 10 BCL/BBSB

SINGLE GANG DATA/TEL. BOX 30mm Deep Standard Pack 10 BCL/SGB

COUPLER PACK Standard Pack 5

TWIN-GANG ACCESSORY BOX Standard Pack 5 BCL/BBTB

TWIN-GANG BOX 30mm Deep Standard Pack 5

BCL/BBCB

WA RW I C K B U S - B A R T R U N K I N G

MAINS CONNECTOR BLOCK BCL/BBMC Pack Quantity 1

BCL/TGB

For Technical information see page 113. Dimensions see page

87

88

DOMESTIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION

S TA R B R E A K E R D O M E S T I C C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

The Starbreaker domestic circuit protection range introduces an innovative modular concept to the market. By employing a unique busbar system a balance is achieved between the conventional ’factory built‘ approach and the time consuming on-site assembly of many individual components. Starbreaker consumer units can be quickly and easily made up on site by selection of an enclosure, busbar, main incoming device and, if required, split - load RCCB.

89

ENCLOSURES

l

The range of enclosures from 4 to 20 modules as all insulated and 4 to 40 modules as metal cased with a new improved steel front cover, all finished in a stylish semi-matt finish. ● ● ●

●

415/0A

S TA R B R E A K E R M A I N I N C O M I N G & O U T G O I N G D E V I C E S

●

90

Type tested to BS 5486 Part 13: 1989 and BS EN 60439-3 when fully assembled. All enclosures are supplied ready prepared for the unique busbar to be easily fitted into place. Each enclosure is supplied complete with: – 35mm metal DIN rail. – Factory-fitted 16mm2 flexible neutral connection. – Installation instructions, unique circuit identification labels and guide. – 16mm2 earth and neutral bar terminal assembly. The neutral lead fitted to all enclosures facilitates siting the main incoming device on the left hand side. If siting is required on the right this lead should be replaced by one of suitable length (16mm2). In split-load applications the RCCB neutral connections must also be reversed. Suitable for use with control modules.

ALL INSULATED ENCLOSURES l H W 4 modular ways 6 modular ways 9 modular ways 12 modular ways 15 modular ways 20 modular ways

160 230 230 230 230 230

117 190 243 294 344 439

D 102 120 120 120 120 120

404/0A* 406/0A 409/0A 412/0A 415/0A 420/0A

Large selection of knock-outs suiting any cable routing – also readily accommodates mini-trunking. * Includes Busbar. ●

420/0A

SURFACE METAL CASED 4 modular ways 6 modular ways 9 modular ways 12 modular ways 15 modular ways 20 modular ways 24 modular ways 2 Bank 30 modular ways 2 Bank 40 modular ways 2 Bank

l

H

W

D

210 210 210 210 210 210 450 450 450

117 188 241 292 353 438 292 353 438

121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121

804/0A* 806/0A 809/0A 812/0A 815/0A 820/0A 824/2A 830/2A 840/2A

Raised keyhole slots for easy mounting on uneven surfaces. Ample wiring space. ● Adequate knock-outs in robust metal box for side or rear entry of wiring. * Includes Busbar. ● ●

FLUSH METAL CASED 9 modular ways 12 modular ways 15 modular ways 20 modular ways 830/2A

●

l

H

W

D

250 250 250 250

281 332 393 478

121 121 121 121

Adequate knock-outs in robust metal box for side or rear entry of wiring.

SPINE BACKPLATE CHASSIS

l

15 module, grey metal cover 15 module, white PVC cover & shield 20 module, PVC cover & shield with 435mm centres ● ● ● ●

915/0M

915/0W

809/0AF 812/0AF 815/0AF 820/0AF

915/0M 915/0W 920/0W/435

Designed for installation into meter cabinets (eg Clifton). Provide a method of updating such installations with MCB and RCCB protection. Available in standard Metal format or with extended PVC front plate and shield. Dimensions see page 129.

MAIN INCOMING & SPLIT-LOAD DEVICES

100/M2

100/2MT

100/SP1 100/DC1

100/DC2

DESCRIPTION RATING Main switch disconnector 40A DP Main switch disconnector 63A DP Main switch disconnector 100A DP Main switch disconnector 100A SP Main switch disconnector c/w tap off terminal 100A DP Direct connection unit 100A DP Direct connection unit 100A SP ● 100A main switches to BS EN 60947-3

MODULES 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 ●

100/2MT 100/DC2 100/DC1 50mm2 terminal capacity.

RCD TYPE AC

380/030

363/S030

DESCRIPTION Main incoming RCCB Main incoming RCCB Main incoming RCCB Main incoming RCCB Main incoming RCCB Main incoming RCCB Main incoming RCCB Main incoming RCCB Main incoming TD RCCB Split-load RCCB Split-load RCCB Split-load RCCB Split-load RCCB ● BS EN 61008; IEC 1008.

l

LIST No 40/M2 63/M2 100/M2 100/SP1

RCD TYPE A

RATING LIST No LIST No 25A DP, 30mA 325/030 325/A030 40A DP, 30mA 340/030 340/A030 40A DP, 100mA 340/100 340/A100 63A DP, 30mA 363/030 363/A030 80A DP, 30mA 380/030 380/A030 80A DP, 100mA 380/100 100A DP, 30mA 310/030 310/A030 100A DP, 100mA 310/100 100A DP, 100mA 310/100TD 63A DP, 30mA 363/S030 363/AS030 63A DP, 100mA 363/S100 363/AS100 80A DP, 30mA 380/S030 380/AS030 80A DP, 100mA 380/S100 380/AS100 ● Electro-mechanical. ● 50mm2 terminal capacity.

OUTGOING DEVICES

l

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

l

LIST No

61/B06 61/B10 61/B16 61/B20 61/B32 61/B40 61/B50

CURRENT RATING (A) 6

MODULES 1

Type B 61/B06

Type C 61/C06

10

1

61/B10

61/C10

16

1

61/B16

61/C16

20

1

61/B20

61/C20

32

1

61/B32

61/C32

40

1

61/B40

61/C40

50

1

61/B50

61/C50

● ●

BS EN 60898; 6kA – 240V 50Hz. Type B classification (3–5In). Type C classification (5–10In). 16mm2 terminal capacity.

Replacement MCBs for Starbreaker consumer units pre July 1992 SB6000 range to BS 3871. ● Suffix List No. 610/ _ _ with the required rating between 6A and 40A. eg 610/32 = 32A single pole Type 1 MCB. ● Type 2 classification available in 6A and 16A ratings eg 610/062 = 6A single pole Type 2 MCB. ●

61/C06 61/C10 61/C16 61/C20 61/C32 61/C40 61/C50

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (RCBO) CURRENT RATING (A) 6 10 16 20 32 40 ● ●

61/C13230

l

TWO MODULE

SINGLE MODULE

LIST No

LIST No

30mA 61/B0630 61/B1030 61/B1630 61/B2030 61/B3230 61/B4030

10mA 61/B0610 61/B1010 61/B1610 61/B2010 61/B3210 61/B4010

30mA 61/C10630 61/C11030 61/C11630 61/C12030 61/C13230 61/C14030

BS EN 61009; IEC 1009. 2 module device. 10mm2, 1 module device 35mm2 terminal capacity.

CAUTION These devices are electronic units and should be disconnected from the supply during insulation and earth fault loop impedance testing.

S TA R B R E A K E R E N C L O S U R E S

●

Full Technical Information see page 114-119.

91

STARBREAKER BUSBAR SELECTION 9815M 9118 9860

l

Busbars are supplied ready assembled in a variety of configurations to cater for the majority of arrangements from main incomer to split-load, twin and multi tariff. Once in position the busbar is suspended at a height which allows 25mm2 cable to be routed underneath. Other arrangements of split busbar are available to order. Supplied leads are for split load applications only.

9090 & 9060

S TA R B R E A K E R B U S B A R S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

MAIN INCOMING

92

Modular ways

List No

100A double pole main switch incomer MCB ways Layout

RCCB main incomer MCB ways Layout

6

9060

4

4

9

9090

7

7

12

9120

10

10

15

9150

13

13

20

9200

18

18

100A double pole main switch + 100A double pole main switch MCB ways Layout

SPLIT-LOAD & DUAL TARIFF

Modular ways

List No

100A double pole main switch + 63A or 80A split-load RCCB MCB ways Layout

9

9530

2+2

3+2

12

9560

2+5

3+5

12

9650

3+4

4+4

12

9740

4+3

5+3

12

9830

5+2

6+2

15

9680

3+7

4+7

15

9770

4+6

5+6

15

9860

5+5

6+5

15

9950

6+4

7+4

15

9104

7+3

8+3

20

9811

5 + 10

6 + 10

20

9910

6+9

7+9

20

9109

7+8

8+8

20

9118

8+7

9+7

20

9127

9+6

10 + 6

20

9136

10 + 5

11 + 5

KEY

Main switch

RCCB

The 100A Double Pole main switch can be replaced by a main incoming RCCB without impacting on the number of MCB ways available

MULTI TARIFF HEATING CONTROL Modular ways

List No

100A double pole main switch + 100A double pole main switch + 100A double pole main switch MCB ways Layout

15

9414/M

4+1+4

20

9815/M

8+1+5

20

9716/M

7+1+6

RADIO TELESWITCH

Multi-tariff heating provides 3 tariffs catering for total heating applications

TO STANDARD CONSUMER UNIT

1 Direct heating appliances MAIN SWITCH

HEATING CONTROL METER

STANDARD METER

MAIN SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

2 Bottom Immersion Heater 3 Storage heating

1

2

3

NOTE 15 module enclosures will accommodate this facility, however the enclosure is not fitted with three neutral bars. In this instance the bottom immersion heater neutral should be connected directly to the bottom neutral terminal on the appropriate main switch.

SERVICE CUT OUT FUSE 100A

INCOMING SUPPLY

SPLIT-LOAD DUAL TARIFF List No

100A double pole main switch + 63A or 80A split-load RCCB + 100A double pole main switch MCB ways Layout

15

9233/ST

2+3+3

20

9837/ST

5+2+6

20

9675/ST

3+6+4

MAIN SWITCH

HEATING CONTROL METER

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

MAIN SWITCH

Combining the added safety of a split-load RCCB and the economy heating tariff into one combined unit offers an all-round saving of space and installation time.

STANDARD METER

SERVICE CUT OUT FUSE 100A

INCOMING SUPPLY

SPLIT-LOAD DUAL RCCB Modular ways

List No

100A double pole main switch + 63A or 80A split-load RCCB + 80A double pole RCCB incomer MCB ways Layout

15

9355/ST

4+4

20

9387/ST

7+6

2 BANK SPLIT-LOAD DUAL RCCB Modular ways

List No

100A double pole main switch + 63A or 80A split-load RCCB MCB ways Layout

12

9380/D

7

15

9311/D

10

20

9316/D

15

KEY

Main switch

RCCB

The 100A Double Pole main switch can be replaced by a main incoming RCCB without impacting on the number of MCB ways available

S TA R B R E A K E R B U S B A R S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

Modular ways

93

ALL-INSULATED

l

The following selection tables enable easy identification of the components required to build a variety of consumer units.

=

+

+

SURFACE Available MCB ways

Rating

Consumer unit List No

Surface moulded enclosure

Busbar

Main incoming Split-load device RCCB

Main switch consumer units

S TA R B R E A K E R C O N S U M E R U N I T S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

(100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways)

94

2

40A

402/2

404/0A

-

40/MI2

-

4

100A

404/2

406/0A

9060

100/MI2

-

7

100A

407/2

409/0A

9090

100/MI2

-

10

100A

410/2

412/0A

9120

100/MI2

-

13

100A

413/2

415/0A

9150

100/MI2

-

18

100A

418/2

420/0A

9200

100/MI2

-

407/2

RCCB consumer units (Double pole RCCB control for all MCB ways)

407/383

2

40A 30mA

402/343

404/0A

-

340/030

-

2

63A 30mA

402/363

404/0A

-

363/030

-

4

40A 30mA

404/343

406/0A

9060

340/030

-

4

80A 30mA

404/383

406/0A

9060

380/030

-

7

40A 30mA

407/343

409/0A

9090

340/030

-

7

80A 30mA

407/383

409/0A

9090

380/030

-

10

80A 30mA

410/383

412/0A

9120

380/030

-

10

100A 30mA

410/313

412/0A

9120

310/030

-

13

80A 30mA

413/383

415/0A

9150

380/030

-

13

100A 30mA

413/313

415/0A

9150

310/030

-

18

80A 30mA

418/383

420/0A

9200

380/030

-

18

100A 30mA

418/313

420/0A

9200

310/030

-

Split-load consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 63A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways)

410/2563

2+2

63A 30mA

404/2263

409/0A

9530

100/MI2 363/S030

2+5

63A 30mA

407/2263

412/0A

9560

100/MI2 363/S030

3+4

63A 30mA

407/2363

412/0A

9650

100/MI2 363/S030

4+3

63A 30mA

407/2463

412/0A

9740

100/MI2 363/S030

5+2

63A 30mA

407/2563

412/0A

9830

100/MI2 363/S030

3+7

63A 30mA

410/2363

415/0A

9680

100/MI2 363/S030

4+6

63A 30mA

410/2463

415/0A

9770

100/MI2 363/S030

5+5

63A 30mA

410/2563

415/0A

9860

100/MI2 363/S030

6+4

63A 30mA

410/2663

415/0A

9950

100/MI2 363/S030

7+3

63A 30mA

410/2763

415/0A

9104

100/MI2 363/S030

5 + 10

63A 30mA

415/2563

420/0A

9811

100/MI2 363/S030

6+9

63A 30mA

415/2663

420/0A

9910

100/MI2 363/S030

7+8

63A 30mA

415/2763

420/0A

9109

100/MI2 363/S030

8+7

63A 30mA

415/2863

420/0A

9118

100/MI2 363/S030

9+6

63A 30mA

415/2963

420/0A

9127

100/MI2 363/S030

10 + 5

63A 30mA

415/2163

420/0A

9136

100/MI2 363/S030

Factory-built consumer units are available to order – Add B to the consumer unit List No. eg 404/2B. For 80A split-load consumer units, use 380/S030 or 380/S100 split-load RCCBs. The above RCCBs are Type AC. Type A RCCBs are available – Add A to the consumer unit List No. eg 410/A2663.

ALL-INSULATED

l

The following selection tables enable easy identification of the components required to build a variety of consumer units.

=

+

+

SURFACE Available MCB ways

Rating

Consumer unit List No

Surface moulded enclosure

Busbar

Main incoming device

RCCB

Dual tariff consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for each tariff)

100A

405/232

409/0A

9530

100/MI2 x 2

-

3+5

100A

408/232

412/0A

9560

100/MI2 x 2

-

4+4

100A

408/242

412/0A

9650

100/MI2 x 2

-

5+3

100A

408/252

412/0A

9740

100/MI2 x 2

-

6+2

100A

408/262

412/0A

9830

100/MI2 x 2

-

4+7

100A

411/242

415/0A

9680

100/MI2 x 2

-

5+6

100A

411/252

415/0A

9770

100/MI2 x 2

-

6+5

100A

411/262

415/0A

9860

100/MI2 x 2

-

7+4

100A

411/272

415/0A

9950

100/MI2 x 2

-

8+3

100A

411/282

415/0A

9104

100/MI2 x 2

-

6 + 10

100A

416/262

420/0A

9811

100/MI2 x 2

-

7+9

100A

416/272

420/0A

9910

100/MI2 x 2

-

8+8

100A

416/282

420/0A

9109

100/MI2 x 2

-

9+7

100A

416/292

420/0A

9118

100/MI2 x 2

-

10 + 6

100A

416/212

420/0A

9127

100/MI2 x 2

-

11 + 5

100A

416/2112

420/0A

9136

100/MI2 x 2

-

411/262

Multi tariff consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for each tariff)

4+1+4

100A

409/242124

415/0A

9414/M

100/MI2 x 3

-

8+1+5

100A

414/282125

420/0A

9815/M

100/MI2 x 3

-

7+1+6

100A

414/272126

420/0A

9716/M

100/MI2 x 3

-

Split-load dual tariff consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 63A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways, (100A double pole main switch control for storage heating MCBs)

2+3+3

63A 30mA

408/22623

415/0A

9233/ST

100/MI2 x 2 363/S030

5+2+6

63A 30mA

413/25626

420/0A

9837/ST

100/MI2 x 2 363/S030

3+6+4

63A 30mA

413/23624

420/0A

9675/ST

100/MI2 x 2 363/S030

409/242124

Split-load dual RCCB consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 63A split-load RCCB control for selected MCB ways, (80A main switch RCCB control for selected MCB ways)

408/22623

4+4

63A 100mA 80A 30mA

408/26484

415/0A

9355/ST

100/2MT

363/S100 380/030

7+6

63A 100mA 80A 30mA

413/26786

420/0A

9387/ST

100/2MT

363/S100 380/030

The above RCCBs are Type AC. Type A RCCBs are available – Add A to the consumer unit List No. eg 413/A26786.

408/26484

S TA R B R E A K E R C O N S U M E R U N I T S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

3+2

95

METAL CASED

l

The following selection tables enable easy identification of the components required to build a variety of consumer units.

=

+

+

SURFACE Available MCB ways

Rating

Consumer unit List No

Surface metal enclosure

Busbar

Main incoming Split-load device RCCB

Main switch consumer units

S TA R B R E A K E R C O N S U M E R U N I T S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

(100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways)

96

807/2

2

40A

802/2

804/0A

-

40/MI2

-

4

100A

804/2

806/0A

9060

100/MI2

-

7

100A

807/2

809/0A

9090

100/MI2

-

10

100A

810/2

812/0A

9120

100/MI2

-

13

100A

813/2

815/0A

9150

100/MI2

-

18

100A

818/2

820/0A

9200

100/MI2

-

RCCB consumer units (Double pole RCCB control for all MCB ways)

810/383

2

40A 30mA

802/343

804/0A

-

340/030

-

2

63A 30mA

802/363

804/0A

-

363/030

-

4

40A 30mA

804/343

806/0A

9060

340/030

-

4

80A 30mA

804/383

806/0A

9060

380/030

-

7

40A 30mA

807/343

809/0A

9090

340/030

-

7

80A 30mA

807/383

809/0A

9090

380/030

-

10

80A 30mA

810/383

812/0A

9120

380/030

-

10

100A 30mA

810/313

812/0A

9120

310/030

-

13

80A 30mA

813/383

815/0A

9150

380/030

-

13

100A 30mA

813/313

815/0A

9150

310/030

-

18

80A 30mA

818/383

820/0A

9200

380/030

-

18

100A 30mA

818/313

820/0A

9200

310/030

-

Split-load consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 63A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways)

810/2363

2+2

63A 30mA

804/2263

809/0A

9530

100/MI2 363/S030

2+5

63A 30mA

807/2263

812/0A

9560

100/MI2 363/S030

3+4

63A 30mA

807/2363

812/0A

9650

100/MI2 363/S030

4+3

63A 30mA

807/2463

812/0A

9740

100/MI2 363/S030

5+2

63A 30mA

807/2563

812/0A

9830

100/MI2 363/S030

3+7

63A 30mA

810/2363

815/0A

9680

100/MI2 363/S030

4+6

63A 30mA

810/2463

815/0A

9770

100/MI2 363/S030

5+5

63A 30mA

810/2563

815/0A

9860

100/MI2 363/S030

6+4

63A 30mA

810/2663

815/0A

9950

100/MI2 363/S030

7+3

63A 30mA

810/2763

815/0A

9104

100/MI2 363/S030

5 + 10

63A 30mA

815/2563

820/0A

9811

100/MI2 363/S030

7+8

63A 30mA

815/2763

820/0A

9109

100/MI2 363/S030

6+9

63A 30mA

815/2663

820/0A

9910

100/MI2 363/S030

8+7 9+6

63A 30mA 63A 30mA

815/2863 815/2963

820/0A 820/0A

9118 9127

100/MI2 363/S030 100/MI2 363/S030

For flush mounting units up to 20 module – Add F to consumer unit and enclosure List No. eg 807/2F, 809/0AF. Factory-built consumer units are available to order – Add B to the consumer unit List No. eg 807/2B. For 80A split-load consumer units use 380/S030 or 380/S100 split-load RCCBs. The above RCCBs are Type AC. Type A RCCBs are available – Add A to the consumer unit List No. eg 810/A2663. Note The split arrangements in split-load configurations represent circuits unprotected and protected respectively eg 3 + 6 = 3 MCB ways unprotected and 6 MCB ways protected by the RCCB. 100mA version RCCB’s available replace final digit 3 with 1 i.e. 810/2363 would become 810/2361

METAL CASED

l

The following selection tables enable easy identification of the components required to build a variety of consumer units.

+

=

+

+

SURFACE Available MCB ways

Rating

Consumer unit List No

Surface metal enclosure

Busbar

Main incoming device

Split-load RCCB

Dual tariff consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for each tariff)

100A

805/232

809/0A

9530

100/MI2 x 2

-

3+5

100A

808/232

812/0A

9560

100/MI2 x 2

-

4+4

100A

808/242

812/0A

9650

100/MI2 x 2

-

5+3

100A

808/252

812/0A

9740

100/MI2 x 2

-

6+2

100A

808/262

812/0A

9830

100/MI2 x 2

-

4+7

100A

811/242

815/0A

9680

100/MI2 x 2

-

5+6

100A

811/252

815/0A

9770

100/MI2 x 2

-

6+5

100A

811/262

815/0A

9860

100/MI2 x 2

-

7+4

100A

811/272

815/0A

9950

100/MI2 x 2

-

8+3

100A

811/282

815/0A

9104

100/MI2 x 2

-

6 + 10

100A

816/262

820/0A

9811

100/MI2 x 2

-

7+9

100A

816/272

820/0A

9910

100/MI2 x 2

-

8+8

100A

816/282

820/0A

9109

100/MI2 x 2

-

10 + 6

100A

816/212

820/0A

9127

100/MI2 x 2

-

9+7

100A

816/292

820/0A

9118

100/MI2 x 2

-

11 + 5

100A

816/2112

820/0A

9136

100/MI2 x 2 -

808/252

Multi tariff consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for each tariff)

4+1+4

100A

809/242124

815/0A

9414/M

100/MI2 x 3

-

8+1+5

100A

814/282125

820/0A

9815/M

100/MI2 x 3

-

7+1+6

100A

814/272126

820/0A

9716/M

100/MI2 x 3

-

Split-load dual tariff consumer units (100A double pole main switch + 63A/80A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways, (100A double pole main switch control for storage heating MCBs)

814/282125

2+3+3

63A 30mA

808/22623

815/0A

9233/ST

100/MI2 x 2 363/S030

5+2+6

63A 30mA

813/25626

820/0A

9837/ST

100/MI2 x 2 363/S030

5+2+6

80A 30mA

813/25826

820/0A

9837/ST

100/MI2 x 2 380/S030

3+6+4

63A 30mA

813/23624

820/0A

9675/ST

100/MI2 x 2 363/S030

3+6+4

80A 30mA

813/23824

820/0A

9675/ST

100/MI2 x 2 380/S030 808/22623

Split-load dual RCCB consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 63A/80A split-load RCCB control for selected MCB ways, (80A main switch RCCB control for selected MCB ways)

4+4

63A 100mA 80A 30mA

808/26484

815/0A

9355/ST

100/2MT

363/S100 380/030

4+4

80A 100mA 80A 30mA

808/28484

815/0A

9355/ST

100/2MT

380/S100 380/030

7+6

63A 100mA 80A 30mA

813/26786

820/0A

9387/ST

100/2MT

363/S100 380/030

7+6

80A 100mA 80A 30mA

813/28786

820/0A

9387/ST

100/2MT

380/S100 380/030

For flush mounting units up to 20 module – Add F to consumer unit and enclosure List No. eg 808/232F, 812/0AF. Factory-built consumer units are available to order – Add B to the consumer unit List No. eg 808/232B. The above RCCBs are Type AC. Type A RCCBs are available – Add A to the consumer unit List No. eg 813/A26786.

813/26786

S TA R B R E A K E R C O N S U M E R U N I T S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

3+2

97

METAL CASED

l

The following selection tables enable easy identification of the components required to build a variety of consumer units.

2 BANK CONSUMER UNITS

l

+

=

Available MCB ways

Rating

Consumer unit List No

Surface metal enclosure

Busbar

+

+

Main incoming device

Split-load RCCB

S TA R B R E A K E R C O N S U M E R U N I T S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

(100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 63A/80A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways, (80A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways)

98

817/26183

10 + 10

80A 30mA

820/283

824/2A

9120 x 2

100/2MT

380/030

7 + 10

63A 30mA 80A 30mA

817/26383

824/2A

9380/D 9120

100/2MT

363/S030 380/030

7 + 10

63A 100mA 80A 30mA

817/26183

824/2A

9380/D 9120

100/2MT

363/S100 380/030

13 + 13

80A 30mA

826/283

830/2A

9150 x 2

100/2MT

380/030

10 + 13

63A 30mA 80A 30mA

823/26383

830/2A

9311/D 9150

100/2MT

363/S030 380/030

10 + 13

63A 100mA 80A 30mA

823/26183

830/2A

9311/D 9150

100/2MT

363/S100 380/030

18 + 18

80A 30mA

836/283

840/2A

9200 x 2

100/2MT

380/030

15 + 18

63A 30mA 80A 30mA

833/26383

840/2A

9316/D 9200

100/2MT

363/S030 380/030

15 + 18

63A 100mA 80A 30mA

833/26183

840/2A

9316/D 9200

100/2MT

363/S100 380/030

Factory-built consumer units are available to order – Add B to the consumer unit List No. eg 820/283B. For 2 bank and dual RCCB consumer units, the Type A RCCB makes reference to the 30mA downstream device.

SPINE BACKPLATE CONSUMER UNITS

l

= Available MCB ways

Rating

Consumer unit List No

+

+

+

Chassis

Busbar

Main incoming Split-load device RCCB

915/0*

9150

100/MI2

915/0*

9150

380/030

Main switch spine unit (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways)

13

100A

913/2*

RCCB spine unit (Double pole RCCB control for all MCB ways)

910/2483

13

80A 30mA

913/383*

Split-load spine units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 80A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways)

3+7

80A 30mA

910/2383*

915/0*

9680

100/MI2 380/S030

4+6

80A 30mA

910/2483*

915/0*

9770

100/MI2 380/S030

5+5

80A 30mA

910/2583*

915/0*

9860

100/MI2 380/S030

6+4

80A 30mA

910/2683*

915/0*

9950

100/MI2 380/S030

3+7

80A 100mA

910/2381*

915/0*

9680

100/MI2 380/S100

4+6

80A 100mA

910/2481*

915/0*

9770

100/MI2 380/S100

5+5

80A 100mA

910/2581*

915/0*

9860

100/MI2 380/S100

6+4 80A 100mA 910/2681* 915/0* * Add M for Grey Metal front plate or W for White PVC front plate.

9950

100/MI2 380/S100

METAL CASED

l

The following selection tables enable easy identification of the components required to build a variety of consumer units.

+

=

+

+

FLUSH Available MCB ways

Rating

Consumer unit List No

Surface metal enclosure

Busbar

Main incoming device

Split-load RCCB

Main switch consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways)

7

100A

807/2F

809/0AF

9090

100/MI2

-

10

100A

810/2F

812/0AF

9120

100/MI2

-

13

100A

813/2F

815/0AF

9150

100/MI2

807/2F

RCCB consumer units 7

40A 30mA

807/343F

809/0AF

9090

340/030

-

7

80A 30mA

807/383F

809/0AF

9090

380/030

-

10

40A 30mA

810/343F

812/0AF

9120

340/030

-

10

80A 30mA

810/383F

812/0AF

9120

380/030

-

13

80A 30mA

813/383F

815/0AF

9150

380/030

807/383F

Split-load consumer units (100A double pole main switch control for all MCB ways, 63A double pole RCCB control for selected MCB ways)

2+5

63A 30mA

807/2263F

812/0AF

9560

100/MI2

363/S030

3+4

63A 30mA

807/2363F

812/0AF

9650

100/MI2

363/S030

3+7

63A 30mA

810/2363F

815/0AF

9680

100/MI2

363/S030

4+6

63A 30mA

810/2463F

815/0AF

9770

100/MI2

363/S030

5+5

63A 30mA

810/2563F

815/0AF

9860

100/MI2

363/S030

6+4

63A 30mA

810/2663F

815/0AF

9950

100/MI2

363/S030

810/2363F

BUILT-UP FACTORY ASSEMBLED ALL INSULATED Description

List No

100A DP main switch + 13 MCB ways

413/2B

Main switch + 4, RCCB + 6

410/2463B

Main switch + 5, RCCB + 5

410/2563B

Main switch + 5, 80A 30mA RCCB + 5

410/2583B

Main switch + 6, RCCB + 4

410/2663B

Main switch + 6, RCCB + 9

415/2663B

Main switch + 7, RCCB + 8

415/2763B

Main switch + 8, RCCB + 7

415/2863B

410/2563B

METAL CASED Description

List No

100A DP main switch + 13 MCB ways

813/2B

Main switch + 3, RCCB + 7

810/2363B

Main switch + 4, RCCB + 6

810/2463B

The above units come complete with appropriate enclosure, busbar, Main switch and RCCB if applicable.

810/2463B

S TA R B R E A K E R C O N S U M E R U N I T S E L E C T I O N G U I D E

(Double pole RCCB control for all MCB ways)

99

CONTROL MODULES TIMESWITCHES

302/TD1

303/TS24

303/TQ7

301/S7

l

l

DESCRIPTION

MODULES LIST No

1 channel 7 day/24hr digital

2

302/TD1

2 channel 7 day/24hr digital

2

302/TD2

24hr analogue synchronous

3

303/TS24

24hr analogue quartz

3

303/TQ24

7 day analogue quartz

3

303/TQ7

1–7 min staircase

1

301/S7

● ● ●

All timers have 16A resistive rating. Power reserve: 150hr – quartz timers. Power reserve: 250hr – digital timers.

SILENT OPERATION INSTALLATION ORS Pole Configuration N/O N/C 2 0 1 1 0 2 4 0 3 1 2 2 0 4 4 0 3 1 2 2 0 4 4 0 3 1 2 2 0 4

Description 20A Double Pole 24A Four Pole

40A Four Pole

63 A Four Pole

CIK22-20

CIK24–31

CIK63–40

Auxiliary s

1 2

4 Mod

1 0

CHHSLA11 CHHSLA20

l

MODULES LIST No

6, 8, 12V bell transformer

2

303/B12

With overload protection.

TWILIGHT SWITCH

l

DESCRIPTION

MODULES LIST No

2–2000 lux c/w sensor

3

● ●

303/P2

Sensor to IP54. Control modules can be installed in Starbreaker enclosures either as part of the consumer unit or separately mounted.

303/P2

ACCESSORIES

l

Way blanking plate MCB Locking Device Way blanking plate for 915/0W Brass padlock and keys Insulating Grommet Barrel lock for metal cased enclosures

For Technical details see page 120-121. Dimensions see page 132.

100

301/CS

DESCRIPTION

●

CONTROL MODULES

3 Mod

LIST No CIK22-20 CIK22-11 CIK22-02 CIK24-40 CIK24-31 CIK24-22 CIK24-04 CIK40-40 CIK40-31 CIK40-22 CIK40-04 CIK63-40 CIK63-31 CIK63-22 CIK63-04

Ventilation module 301/CS must be fitted every 2 ors when mounting ors side by side.

BELL TRANSFORMER

303/B12

2 Mod

0.5 Mod

9mm Ventilation module

●

1 Mod

l

443 MCBLD 943W 748 741 799

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

Crabtree RCDs comply fully with BS EN 61008 to Type A and Type AC classification. TYPE A

Pulsating dc (half wave rectified) waveform

Pulsating dc (chopped) waveform

TYPE AC

Normal ac waveform

Lifestar offers you the protection of Residual Current Devices (RCDs) for any industrial, commercial or domestic application. RCDs rated from 13A to 100A are available in sensitivities from 10mA to 300mA providing safe, secure protection against fire or shock risks caused by earth fault currents. Suitable for screw fixing or DIN rail mounting. Wide range of enclosures available for separately mounting RCCBs, MCBs and RCBOs.

L I F E S TA R R E S I D U A L C U R R E N T D E V I C E S

Pulsating dc (chopped) waveform with a constant dc component

101

13A SAFETY SOCKETS WITH RCD PROTECTION

l

The Lifestar safety socket is available in 1 and 2 gang versions with either 10mA or 30mA sensitivity, enabling products to be precisely matched to specific applications. All safety sockets incorporate pulsating dc fault current protection (Type A operation). ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

Double pole operation, 3mm gap. Trip free mechanism for automatic disconnection of supply. Enables mounting in standard 25mm deep box (moulded variant). Mechanical indication of position. Unique labyrinth switch design minimises visible arc flash and prevents front access to live parts. Surface mounted units supplied with Birch Grey mounting box. Interior units available for mounting into OEM equipment. Comply with BS 7288. RCD sockets are all ive control electromechanical operation and will not trip on loss of mains supply.

MOULDED

PACK QTY

l

1 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4404/A01 1 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4404/A03 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4406/A01 2 gang switched with neon indicator. 30mA tripping current 1 4406/A03 Dimensions 146mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9048 surface, SB665 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining 4406/A03

SURFACE METAL PLATE*

l

PACK QTY

1 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4424/A01_ _* 1 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4424/A03_ _* 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4426/A01_ _* 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4426/A03_ _* Dimensions

142mm x 82mm x 44mm

4424/A01BZ

FLUSH METAL PLATE*

PACK QTY

l

1 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4414/A01_ _* 1 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4414/A03_ _* 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4416/A01_ _* 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4416/A03_ _* Dimensions 146mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining

L I F E S TA R S A F E T Y S O C K E T

4416/A03BZ

INTERIOR

PACK QTY 1 4414/A101 1 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4414/A103 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4416/A101 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4416/A103 l

1 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current

4416/A103

SURFACE METALCLAD

PACK QTY 1 4424/A01BG 1 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4424/A03BG 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4426/A01BG 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4426/A03BG l

1 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current

Dimensions 4426/A03BG

142mm x 82mm x 44mm

For boxes less knockouts see page 68.

FLUSH METALCLAD

PACK QTY 1 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4414/A01BG 1 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4414/A03BG 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 10mA tripping current 1 4416/A01BG 2 gang switched with neon indicator, 30mA tripping current 1 4416/A03BG l

Dimensions 146mm x 86mm Mounting boxes 9223/BG surface, SB625 flush galv. or SB629 dry lining 4414/A01BG

102

All available with two earth terminals to enable installation to comply with section 607 (wiring regulations) Add suffix /TE to List No.

* Metal plate variants available in Satin Chrome - SC, Bronze - BZ and Oyster Gold - YR – Add suffix to List No. eg 4416/A03SC. For further specification details of finishes see page 112.

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS TYPE AC No OF POLES

CURRENT RATING (A) MODULES 30mA

DP

32

2

223/030

-

40

2

224/030

224/100

-

63

2

226/030

226/100

226/300

80

2

228/030

228/100

-

100

224/030

100mA

300mA

-

2

221/030

221/100

221/300

TP & N 32

4

243/030

-

-

40

4

244/030

244/100

244/300

63

4

246/030

246/100

246/300

100

4

241/030

241/100

241/300

228/030

TYPE A

224/100

l

SENSITIVITY

SENSITIVITY

No OF POLES

CURRENT RATING (A) MODULES

10mA

30mA

DP

16

2

216/A010

-

32

2

223/A010

-

40

2

-

224/A030

63

2

-

226/A030

80

2

-

228/A030

100

2

-

221/A030

TP & N 40

4

-

244/A030

63

4

-

246/A030

100

4

-

241/A030

226/100

These units are not interchangeable with the RCCBs now available in the Starbreaker range illustrated on page 90. ● ● ●

BS EN 61008; IEC 1008. Terminal capacities: – 50mm2. Type A rccb’s with 100mA sensitivity available on request.

TIME DELAY - RCCB

l

TYPE AC

221/100TD

SENSITIVITY

No OF POLES

CURRENT RATING (A) MODULES

100mA

2

100

2

221/100TD

-

4

100

4

241/100TD

-

300mA

241/100TD

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (RCBO)

l

6132/030

side view

CURRENT RATING (A) MODULES

10mA

30mA

6

2

6106/010

6106/030

10

2

6110/010

6110/030

16

2

6116/010

6116/030

20

2

6120/010

6120/030

32

2

6132/010

6132/030

40

2

6140/010

6140/030

CAUTION These devices are electronic units and should be disconnected from the supply during insulation and earth fault loop impedance testing. ● ● ●

BS 3871 and BS 4293. Type 1 classification (2.7–4In). 10mm2 terminal capacity.

L I F E S TA R R C D s

SENSITIVITY

Further technical information – see pages 116-117.

103

MODULAR ENCLOSURES 3 MODULE

l

l

DESCRIPTION

LIST No

General purpose enclosure (IP20)

744/3

● ● ● ●

Complete with DIN rail. Features sealable cover. Supplied with cut-out of 2 module size. Converts to 3 module by removing half blanks.

All purpose enclosure (IP65) ●

744/3

● ● ● ●

CBE/3

Complete with DIN rail. Features sealable cover and hinged protective cover. Polycarbonate construction. Accessories available. Self-adhesive way label provided.

Note Max cable capacity 10mm2. For increased cable sizes use 4 module enclosure List No.CBE/4 (up to 25mm2).

CBE/3

4 MODULE

l

DESCRIPTION

LIST No

General purpose enclosure (IP20)

744/4

● ● ●

Suitable for ratings up to 80A. Complete with DIN rail and earth bar. Features sealable cover.

General purpose enclosure (IP20) ● ● ●

Suitable for ratings up to 100A. Complete with DIN rail and earth bar. Features sealable cover.

All purpose enclosure (IP65) 744/4 ● ● ● ● ● ●

L I F E S TA R E N C L O S U R E S

● ●

l

DESCRIPTION

LIST No

General purpose enclosure (IP20)

EN100

844/4

ACCESSORIES FOR ALL PURPOSE ENCLOSURES

l

EARTH TERMINAL

LIST No

5 way, 3 module

CBE3/EK

7 way, 4 module

CBE4/EK

NEUTRAL TERMINAL

5 way, 3 module CBE/BS

CBE/EK

CBE3/NK

7 way, 4 module

CBE4/NK

Blanking strip

CBE/BS

External fixing bracket

ME/FB

Dimensions see page 131.

104

844/4

Suitable for all ratings. Complete with DIN rail and earth terminal. Supplied with blank plate for converting to 3 module opening.

5 MODULE

CBE/4

CBE/4

Suitable for all ratings. Complete with DIN rail. Features sealable cover and hinged protective cover. Polycarbonate construction. Accessories available. Self-adhesive way label provided.

Fabricated steel enclosure (IP20) ●

744/41

TECHNICAL DATA GENERAL International degree of protection WIRING ACCESSORIES

page 106 page

Terminal capacities

107

6A isolating switch

107

Seeklight

107

PIR sensors

108

Light & smoke detector

109

Communication

110

Datapak

111

Luminaire Couplers

111

Low Energy lampholders

112

Metal plate specifications

112

PVC Trunking

113

CIRCUIT PROTECTION

page

MCBs – general

114

MCBs – Starbreaker

115

RCDs – Starbreaker & Lifestar

116

RCBOs & RCDs – general

117

Starbreaker consumer unit applications

118–119

Control modules – general

120–121

TECHNICAL DATA 105

IP RATINGS

l

The IP (International Protection) rating given to an enclosure states the degree of protection it offers by means of two digits. A summary of these is shown below; for a more detailed definition, see IEC 529: 1989, BS EN 60529: 1992. FIRST DIGIT

SECOND DIGIT

T E C H N I C A L D ATA I P R AT I N G S

Protection against solid foreign objects and access to hazardous parts

106

l

Protection against ingress of water

The first digit covers protection against penetration by solid objects, which includes hands and tools such as screwdrivers. At the lowest of seven levels, 0, no protection is offered, either of the equipment itself from damage by intrusion or of a person ing live or moving parts. At the highest, 6, there shall be no entry of dust.

The second digit covers the degree of protection against the entry of water, on a progressive scale. For example, number 1 indicates that dripping water shall have no harmful effect, and number 6, that water projected in powerful jets against the enclosure from any direction shall have no harmful effects.

IP

IP

0

No protection

0

No protection

1

Protected against solid objects up to 50mm eg accidental touch by hands

1

Protected against vertically falling drops of water eg condensation

2

Protected against solid objects up to 12mm eg fingers

2

Protected against direct sprays of water up to 15° from the vertical

3

Protected against solid objects over 2.5mm eg tools and wires

3

Protected against sprays of water up to 60° from the vertical

4

Protected against solid objects over 1mm eg tools, wires and small wires

4

Protected against water splashed from all directions – limited ingress permitted

5

Protected against dust – limited ingress, no harmful deposits

5

Protected against low pressure jets of water from all directions – limited ingress permitted

6

Totally protected against dust

6

Protected against strong jets of water eg for use on ship decks – limited ingress permitted

The letter X can be used in place of the first or second digit to indicate that tests have either not been made or are not applicable. N0TE In the event of additional holes being drilled/pierced or knockouts removed, suitable measures should be taken to restore the products to the original ratings. IEC 529, BS EN 60529 does not apply to protection against the risk of explosion or conditions such as humidity, corrosive gases, fungi or vermin. In certain cases equipment designed to be mounted in an enclosure will contribute towards the stated IP rating (eg pushbuttons mounted in an enclosure). Different parts of enclosures can have different degrees of protection and still conform to the standard (eg enclosures with pre-drilled conduit entry).

l

WIRING ACCESSORIES – GENERAL BRITISH STANDARDS

l

l

An unqualified reference to the British Standards in this product catalogue indicates that the products referred to are marked with the British Standard and therefore comply in all respects with the standard stated. Where a qualification is given against the British Standard, eg BS 3676 where applicable, this means that there is no specific standard for the product in question and it has been tested as far as possible for compliance with the standard indicated.

TERMINAL CAPACITIES (mm 2 ) Product

3 x 2.5mm2, 2 x 4mm2, 2 x 6mm2

13A mounting socket

3 x 2.5mm2, 2 x 4mm2, 1 x 6mm2

10AX Capital / Platinum plate switches 10A Capital architrave switches

4 x 1mm2, 3 x 1.5mm2, 1 x 2.5mm2

20A Capital / Platinum DP switches 32A Capital / Platinum DP switches

3 x 2.5mm2, 2 x 4mm2, 1 x 6mm2, 1 x 10mm2

l

LIST No.4009 For use on 200–250V 50Hz supply only. Not suitable for use with Capital architrave switches. One ‘Seeklight’ position is provided on each full size plate switch.

l

Quantity and gauge of cable accepted by terminals

13A Capital / Platinum socket outlets 13A Capital safety sockets 13A Capital / Platinum fused conn. units

CAPITAL RANGE ‘SEEKLIGHT’ ASSEMBLY

1 Isolate mains before commencing work. 2 Connect neon wires to terminals, as shown in the following wiring 2 diagrams, to suit circuit conditions. 3 Locate neon indicator into position on back of switch plate (figure A). 4 Remove backing from self-adhesive pad and locate over neon to hold it in 4 place (figure B). General note The neon ‘Seeklight’ must be disconnected when carrying out insulation testing to avoid a false reading.

Figure A

Figure B

CONNECTION TO VARIOUS CIRCUITS

l

One-way circuits 2 x 6mm2, 1 x 10mm2, 1 x 16mm2

50A Capital DP switches 45A Capital / Platinum cooker control units

2 x 6mm2, 1 x 10mm2, 1 x 16mm2

Capital / Platinum shaver supply unit Capital light/shaver unit 6A Capital ceiling switches

4 x 1mm2, 3 x 1.5mm2

16A Capital ceiling switches

2 x 2.5mm2 max

50A Capital ceiling switch

3 x 2.5mm2, 2 x 4mm2, 1 x 6mm2, 1 x 10mm2,

N

N

L

L

L2

L1

N2

L2

N1

L1

Two-way circuits

N

Capital ceiling roses Capital safety batten lampholder

1.5mm2 multiway

Capital safety pendant lampholder

1 x 1mm2 flexible cable

16A Minder PIR sensor

6 x 1mm2, 4 x 1.5mm2, 2 x 2.5mm2

L L2

L2

L1

6A TP ISOLATING SWITCH

When installations incorporating electronic devices of the semi-conductor type are being tested, care must normally be taken to ensure that they are not subjected to the output voltage of an insulation tester. However, dimmer switches complying with BS 5518 (eg Crabtree 2190) will not be damaged by the application of a normal 500V insulation resistance test. In all other cases where electronic items are fitted, they should be disconnected whilst the insulation of the installation is tested. A notice, drawing attention to the fact that electronic devices are incorporated in the installation, should always be affixed at the intake position. This also applies to any neon indicators fitted.

L3

L3

L2

L2

L3

L3

L2

L1

L2

L2

L3

L3

L4

L3

N L

l

LIST No. 4017, 4017/1, 6017/_ _ & 4587/BG Complies fully with requirements of BS EN 60947-3 for switch disconnectors. Rated SC making capacity 300A Rated conditional short circuit current 6kA (when protected by Starbreaker 6A mcb) Rated insulation voltage 300V Rated impulse withstand voltage 2.5kV Rated duty Uninterrupted Maximum switching rate 120 switch cycles per hour Rated short time withstand current 100A for 1 second Utilisation category AC 23B, 6A 250V 50Hz

A POINT ON TESTING

L1

L1

L1

Multiple control circuits

N L

L1 l

L1

N L L2

L1

L2

L2

L3

L3

L4

L3

L1

L1

T E C H N I C A L D ATA W I R I N G A C C E S S O R I E S

32A Capital TP & N switches 45A Capital / Platinum DP switches

107

MINDER IVE INFRA RED SENSORS

l

The Minder is a multi-adjustable, ive infrared movement detector. People and animals radiate heat, which is invisible to the human eye (infrared range). Consequently, the recorded infrared energy pattern changes when they enter the detection zone DETECTION RANGE DIAGRAMS 10 m

6.5 m

10 m

ca. 22.5 m

16 m 6m

6m

Minder 90

ca. 16 m

12 m

Minder 220

Minder 280

P,L

P,L

N

N

108

Connection Diagram

Minder 280

TECHNICAL DATA

l

Horizontal range of detection

90˚

220˚

280˚

surveillance levels

4

4

4

Max. frontal range

12m

16m

16m

Max. bilateral range

6m

16m

10m

Switching segments

88

280

372

Water protection

IP55

IP55

IP55

Switch off delay

2s-16min

2s-16min

2s-16min

Dusk sensor, in Lux

5-1000

5-1000

5-1000

P

Luminaire

black

N

black/ white

blue

On-Off switch

P

Luminaire

black

N

Minder

black/ white

blue

T E C H N I C A L D ATA W I R I N G A C C E S S O R I E S

Minder

Connection Diagram (with On-Off Switch)

INSTALLATION

l

The Minder functions optimally when installed lateral to walking direction. When selecting the installation site, ensure that: ● The minder is not covered by rigid or moveable objects (e.g. roofing elements, branches of tree, etc.). ● When unit is installed above, or lateral to luminaires, a minimum distance is always allowed between the unit and the luminaire, in order to prevent maloperation. ● when the unit is installed below luminaires, it is not heated up as a result of radiant heat from the luminaire. When mounted at a height of 2.5m, the detection range is as above mentioned, though deviations in the mounting height cause changes in the detection range. In the case of special conditions at the site (e.g. rows of trees, small plot of land, proximity to road, etc.) the enclosed masking strip can be used to restrict the detection range by sticking it on the Minder lens.

MINDER FAULT FINDING ANALYSIS

l

NATURE OF FAULT

REASON FOR FAULT

REMEDY

Minder does not operate

Lens covered or dirty

Check power supply, uncover and/or clean lens

Inadvertent operation of Minder

Hot air or smoke e.g. out of kitchens activate Minder

Install Minder at a different location

Lamp is permanently on

Permanent movement in the monitored area

Make sure that no heat source is in the detection zone and wait until adjusted time lapse has run down.. For control purposes, please cover the lens completely.

Minder is bridged to manual operation by additional switch

Switch to automatic operation

A new and unique product comprising of an advanced ionisation type smoke detector and emergency light together with a signalling unit combined into a domestic ceiling rose. Activates room lights upon detection of smoke Emergency room light operational upon mains failure To provide an illuminated escape route, keeping you and your family safe Upon failure of your mains electricity supply either by power cut or fire. The emergency light incorporated in the unit will illuminate an average 3 metre square room for a period up to 2 hours, allowing safe convenient movement around your home. Dusk dawn feature prevents activation of the light when a power failure occurs during daylight hours. The unit will stay in standby mode until power supply is resumed or when darkness falls, it will then activate your emergency lighting. You must observe the installation procedures given in the installation instructions.

GENERAL INFORMATION

l

The sensing chamber is designed to detect smoke (not heat or flames). Switch Live (Brown)

Once smoke has been detected the internal siren will activate and illuminate the room light attached to the pendant. If the communication facility has been connected to other units, all the alarms will sound together and illuminate lamps attached to pendants in other rooms.

Permanent Live (Red)

This will act as an early warning signal and will illuminate your home to enable you and your family to escape in the event of a FIRE. No floor boards to lift. No decoration disturbance. Retro fit design (some disruption may be required for communication facility).

Neutral (Blue)

Replaces an existing ceiling rose, it is inconspicuous and aesthetically pleasing. Interconnect (White)

No batteries required, maintenance free, fully sealed, tamper proof unit. Power protection feature - the unit still works via a rechargeable back up supply, if mains power is unavailable . Power supply monitoring system ensures 100% effectiveness. Test the unit at regular intervals (see Testing and Maintenance).

White Unit Plug

Conventional loop in/out

Units Interconnected

Live To next room

Earth

Live

Live

Earth

Earth

Neutral

Neutral

To next room

Neutral Interconnect

Fused lighting circuit from consumer unit

Fused lighting circuit from consumer unit

Switch Live

Switch Live

Room Light Switch

Conventional loop in/out ceiling rose wiring diagram

Room Light Switch

Switch Live ROOM 1 ie Lounge

ROOM 2 ie Hall

Warning: This alarm is mains operated and should be installed in accordance with the published Regulations for Electrical Installations. If in doubt consult a qualified electrician. Failure to install this alarm correctly may expose the to shock or fire hazards.

T E C H N I C A L D ATA L I G H T A N D S M O K E D E T E C T O R

This alarm will not prevent fire and is not a substitute for insurance.

109

CAPITAL TELEPHONE SOCKET OUTLETS

l

The Crabtree Capital range of Telephone Socket Outlets has been developed primarily for use in telephone systems using British Telecom standards. The products are similar in specification to units available from British Telecom. Approval is to BT Specification No.50. Suitable for use in accordance with BS7671, formerly the 16th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations. TERMINATIONS l

CO-AXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS

Note If additional outlets are required, an amplifier should be used. Each outlet is then wired separately to the amplifier.

TV

All telephone outlets should be wired in accordance with the wiring diagrams shown below. Connection of these telephone outlets is by the IDC (Insulation Displacement Connection) method allowing one or two equal size cables (0.40–0.68mm) to be terminated per connection block, using Crabtree connection tool List No.6915 as shown below.

Connection tool

Allow 50mm cable ‘tails’ at each connection block

Connection block

Push home in direction of arrow with connection tool

7265 – Single Direct connection outlet

Excess cable may be trimmed using wire cutters

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C O M M U N I C AT I O N S

WIRING COLOUR CODE

110

Pin number

Base colour/stripe

1 2 3 4 5 6

Green/White Blue/White Orange/White White/Orange White/Blue White/Green

l

In order to comply with the latest EMC directives, all installations containing amplification systems or comprising multiple co-axial socket outlets must be fitted with appropriate earth bonding.

l

1 2 3

Single connection outlet Domestic installation

6 5 4

TV

As seen from rear

WIRING DIAGRAMS

l

Amplifier

Example of typical connections: 1 Connections to 2 & 5 2 Earth recall (when used) connect to terminal 4 3 Connection to terminal 3 is not usually required NB (a) Standard 4 wire cable is shown below as incoming cable. If terminals 1 and 6 (normally unused) are required, 6 wire cable may be used. NB (b) All socket outlet connections are in parallel – any number of socket outlets can be connected, but it is recommended that only a maximum of 5 telephones be used at any one time on one line.

Separate co-axial cable down lead to each outlet

7267 – Single Isolated connection outlet

Existing incoming cable from PBX, etc

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

1st socket outlet (Single master)

Additional socket outlet(s) (Single secondary)

WARNING NOTES In order to comply with current Wiring Regulations, metal faceplate telephone socket outlets must be within the ‘equipotential zone’ of the building they are located in. Therefore an earth terminal is fitted to metal plate units which should be connected to the electrical installation’s earthing system. Testing (a) Connect cables as shown in wiring diagram (b) Plug in telephones (c) Lift receivers and check for dial tone (d) Make an incoming call to check bells work (e) If circuit does not work, disconnect and check thoroughly before reconnecting Note Unauthorised connection of telephone socket outlets to wiring owned by British Telecom is an offence. Further information concerning the requirements of a telephone system installation can be obtained from the Department of Industry or the telephone equipment supplier.

Co-axial outlet installation Communal aerial system eg flats, hotels etc

TV

TV aerial lead l

TV and FM aerial connections use a twin connection outlet (7268) and one co-axial down lead. 1 Fit a co-axial connector to the TV and FM aerial cables. 2 Plug connectors into 7268 in loft. 3 Connect a co-axial cable run between back of 7268 in loft and back of 7268 in 7268 – Twin the living room, then plug TV and FM radio Isolated connection into front of plate.

FM Loft outlet

FM aerial lead

Co-axial down lead

To TV

To radio

Living room outlet

TV/FM outlet installation

outlet

LUMINAIRE COUPLERS

l

5 AND 7 PIN OUTLETS The 5 and 7 pin applications provide addition benefits when utilising building management systems included low voltage, dimmer, emergency lighting circuits, PIR security & EIBUS. Typical 7 pin applications:-

5015 rear view

5013 rear view

Technical details: Terminal capacity: 5x2.5mm2, 3x4mm2, 1x6mm2 per outlet terminal Standards: BS7001 BS5733 general electrical requirements Note: BS 6972 only covers LSC’s rated upto 6A 250V Rating: Static load:

max 10A 250V 5kg

L1 A E LOOP L N A1 A2

Connection Maintained Auxiliary Live Earth Live Loop Live Neutral 0 to 10V 0 to 10V

Description (Emergency Lighting)

Building management systems Building management systems

The LSC is forming an integral part of design installations for many major projects. In new installations the specifier may choose LSCs to offer a versatile lighting system. However, in projects where refurbishment is being undertaken the LSC system is seen as an ideal cost effective solution where hard wiring may already be in place.

DATAPAK TYPICAL USE OF PATCH S, PATCH LEADS & DATA OUTLETS 18" Rack mount Cabinet Phone System

1

2

3

4

5

l

RJ45 Outlets Balun

6

TELEPHONE

CAT 5e Cabling COMPUTER

Balun

Computer System

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

9 10 11 12

TELEPHONE

COMPUTER

6

Balun

TELEPHONE

7

8

9 10 11 12

TELECOM MODULES Master voice module - BT 601 master IDC connectors (Krone style) Capacitor, lightning protection, resistor PABX voice module - IDC connectors Capacitor, no lightning protection, (resistor optional) Secondary voice module - IDC connectors Master voice module (left handed) - BT 601 master IDC connectors Capacitor, lightning protection, resistor Accepts left handed plug

MEDIA MODULES AND ACCESSORIES Triplex unit - TV/SAT/FM splitter. One cable in, carrying combined signals, splits signal back into 3 parts. Each socket is screened, reducing susceptability to noise distortion thus improving picture reception. 50mm x 50mm (double mod size) TV return - screened TV module, used in conjunction with a distribution amplifier to distribute signals to other rooms BNC (female) - accepts BNC male plug, 50 ohm or 70 ohm, as found on co-axial data systems (RG58, Ethernet) and CCTV installations.

BAND WIDTH/CAT

DATA MODULES

Cat 4 -

20Mhz

RJ45 Cat 5e - IDC connector blocks Colour coding - socket/cable/patch Tie wrap facility Use as socket on ISDN system, multiple sockets “daisy-chained”

Cat 5 -

100Mhz

ISDN Terminated (blue shutter) - RJ45 socket with 100 ohm resitor between pins 4 & 5 and one between pins 3 & 6 Ratio 8:1 use RJ11/12 - clasified as data outlet, but used as telecom socket in Eire & USA No capacitor accepts 6p6c plug (RJ12) and 6p4c plug (RJ11)

Cat 5e -

160Mhz

Cat 6 -

250Mhz

T E C H N I C A L D ATA L S C , D ATA PA K

COMPUTER

111

WIRING ACCESSORIES – METAL PLATE SPECIFICATION

T E C H N I C A L D ATA W I R I N G A C C E S S O R I E S & C F L

CAPITAL

112

l

PLATINUM LOW PROFILE Bronze (BZ) Base metal Brass Process 1 Linished and brushed 2 Electrophoretically lacquered 3 Stoved

Satin Chrome (SC) Base metal Brass

Oyster Gold (YR) Base metal Brass Process 1 Linished and brushed 2 Nickel plated 3 Electrophoretically lacquered 4 Stoved

Polished Brass (PB) Base metal Brass

Satin Chrome (SC) Base metal Brass Process 1 Linished and brushed 2 Nickel-chrome plated 2 and lanolin wiped

Highly Polished Chrome (HPC) Base metal Brass

Highly Polished Chrome (HPC) Base metal Brass Process 1 Polished plate 2 Electrophoretically laquered 3 Stoved

Polished Brass (PB) Base metal Brass Process 1 Polished plate 2 Electrophoretically laquered 3 Stoved

Rope Edge Brass (RB) Base metal Brass Process 1 Polish Plate 2 Electrophoretically laquered 3 Stoved

Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) Base metal Stainless Steel Process 1 Polished plate 2

White interior as standard

Black interior as standard

Black interior as standard

PLATINUM FLAT PLATE Stainless Steel (SS) Base metal Stainless Steel White interior as standard

Polished Brass (PB) Base metal Brass Black interior as standard

Polished Stainless Steel (PSS) Base metal Stainless Steel Black interior as standard

Other finishes are available as made to order. HPC/WH - Highly Polished Chrome with white moulded insert. PB/WH - Polished Brass with white moulded insert. SC - Satin Chrome with black moulded insert.

Industrial Grey (BG) Base metal Steel Process 1 Iron phosphated 2 Epoxy polyester powder coated

CFL COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDER

l

The design of the Lampholder accepts an industry standard 4 pin 10/13 Watt Compact Fluorescent G24 or lamp. This reduces the power consumption, when compared to an equivalent incandescent lamp, by up to 80%. The Lampholder is designed to European standards and has a diameter of 42mm, which is larger than the typical Lampholder which is 29mm. A Safety feature which protects the installation will disconnect the supply to the Lampholder:During a lamp change, when no lamp is present, or in the case of lamp failure at the end of lamp life. This Safety feature is reset by switching the supply to the fitting off for 10 to 15 seconds.

The Electrium group of companies is ed for assessed capability to ISO 9002 Part 1. The WARWICK range complies with all requirements of the 16th Edition of the IEE Regulations.

MANUFACTURE All trunking components are manufactured from PVCu material. Base sections, covers and bus-bar base sections are extruded.

CABLE CAPACITIES The following table is from the 16th edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations: Guidance Note 1: Selection and Erection of equipment. The table refers to single core PVC Insulating cables only.

TABLE A5 CABLE FACTORS FOR TRUNKING Type of Conductor

Conductor Cross - Sect. Area

Term

1.5 2.5

7.1 10.2

1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0

8.1 11.4 15.2 22.9 36.3

Solid

Bends, corners, stop ends, t covers and accessory boxes are formed by injection moulding. Flat angles and tees are factory prefabricated from standard profiles.

STRENGTH High impact resistant. The material is formulated to comply with BS4678 Part 4 (1982). Temperature classification -5 to +60°C for permanent application range.

FIRE RESISTANCE The PVCu used in WARWICK trunking is non-propagating and complies with the requirements of BS476 parts 5 & 7 and BS4678 Part 4.

DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP4X

THERMAL PROPERTIES Water Absorbtion – Negligible Mineral Acids – Excellent Detergents – Excellent Note: Some solvents such as Ketones, Aromatics and Hydrocarbons should not be used on PVC trunking

This Appendix is a method which can be used to determine the size of trunking necessary to accommodate cables of the same size, or different sizes. The number of cables drawn into or laid in an enclosure of a wiring system shall be such that no damage is caused to the cables or to the enclosure during their installation. For trunking each size of cable has been allocated a term, as has each trunking. To ascertain the size of trunking required, add together all the cable and compare against the trunking given in the following figures. Note: For power cables a space factor of 45% must apply, therefore, the following represent this in the internal area figures. Angled Top/Bottom section:Area 1176mm Term Value 532 Central section:Area 3483mm

2) All ts should have a 5mm gap to allow for expansion and base section corners should be mitred. The cutting of the base sections is not critical as the manufactured fittings cover the ts and overlap the trunking lids. 3) For cutting it is recommended that a fine tooth tenon or hacksaw is used. Use a sharp knife or file for trimming. 4) Should screening be required this can now be inserted into the relevant compartment. 5) Socket and data boxes can be positioned and wiring can begin. 6) On completion of all wiring, the covers, t covers etc can be inserted. 7) Finally, all power/data/telephone accessories can be wired and fixed. The Earth Loop Impedance Test can now be carried out. INSTALLATION TIPS Installation around columns.

76 mm Min

Accessory Boxes Drill hole of suitable size

Term Value 1576

Square Top/Bottom section:Area 1507mm Term Value 682 Extended Bottom section:Area 3499mm Term Value 1583

All boxes are on the same plain. Therefore, holes should be drilled from top or bottom to accommodate data and telephone cabling.

T E C H N I C A L D ATA WA R W I C K P V C

FINISH Manufactured in White Semi-gloss finish.

Standard

INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS 1) The base section and extension base (if used) should be plug and screw fixed to the wall ensuring washers are used behind the screw head for a more secure fix.

138 mm Min

STANDARDS Manufactured to comply with the requirements of BS4678: Part 4 (1982) and BSEN 50085-1 (1999).

113

MCBs – GENERAL

l

Crabtree Starbreaker MCBs comply fully with BS EN 60898 and therefore enable the requirements of BS 7671 to be met. TYPE CLASSIFICATION

l

BS EN 60898 specifies different tripping characteristics for different types of MCB, depending on the level of overload current required to make the MCB trip out in less than 100 milliseconds. Crabtree MCBs are available as types B, C or D, enabling installation designers to choose an MCB with a characteristic closely matched to the circuit requirement.

INDIRECT SHOCK RISK PROTECTION

l

BS 7671, formerly the IEE Wiring Regulations requires that measures are taken to protect against the risk of electric shock, which can be the result of with live parts. MCBs can be used in conjunction with earthed equipotential bonding to achieve the required disconnection times of 0.4 seconds for 230V socket outlets and 5 seconds for circuits supplying fixed equipment (Regulation 413–02–08). This regulation, together with tables 41B1, 41B2 and 41D, specifies the maximum permissible earth fault loop impedance which is allowed using various protective devices. EARTH FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCES (ZS) TO GIVE COMPLIANCE WITH BS 7671 REGULATION 413-02-08 AT 230V Maximum earth fault loop impedance in ohms for circuits supplying socket outlets (also fixed equipment in bathrooms)

114

l

Regulation 432–02–01 of BS 7671 requires that a device providing protection against overload currents and fault currents shall be capable of breaking any overcurrent up to and including the prospective fault current at the point where the device is installed. In domestic situations this could be as high as 16kA, in industrial situations it could be even higher. According to regulation 434–03–01, the prospective fault current can be higher than the breaking capacity of the protective device if another protective device having the necessary breaking capacity is installed on the supply side. This means that MCBs can be backed up by devices of greater capacity such as HRC fuses. When providing back-up protection, consideration must be given to discrimination. Discrimination is said to occur when the device nearest the fault operates first.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CONSIDERATIONS

BS

RATINGS 5A 15A 20A 30A 45A

Rewireable fuses

BS 3036

10

House service fuse BS 1361

10.9 3.43 1.78 1.2

0.6

BS EN 60898 9.6

3.2

2.4

1.6

1.07

Type C MCB

BS EN 60898 4.8

1.6

1.2

0.8

0.53

HRC fuse

l

2.67 1.85 1.14 0.62

Type B MCB

BS

RENARD SERIES OF RATINGS 6A 10A 16A 20A 32A 40A 50A 63A

BS 88

8.89 5.33 2.82 1.85 1.09 0.86 0.63 –

Type B MCB BS EN 60898 8

4.8

3

2.4

1.5

Type C MCB BS EN 60898 4

2.4

1.5

1.2

0.75 0.60 0.48 0.38

1.2

0.96 0.76

At these values of loop impedance fuses will operate within 0.4 seconds and MCBs will operate in 0.1 second. Type D MCBs are not quoted in BS 7671 since it is considered unlikely that the low earth loop impedances necessary can be achieved in practice.

Starbreaker MCBs are calibrated to meet the requirements of BS EN 60898, 30°C Ref Calibration Temperature. At other temperatures the following rating factors should be used: At 60°C 0.9

At 20°C 1.0

At 0°C 1.1

2 HRS 1 HR

Adjacent thermal-magnetic MCBs should not be continuously loaded at or approaching their nominal rated currents when mounted in enclosures. It is good engineering practice to apply generous de-rating factors or make provision for adequate free air between devices. In these situations, and in common with other manufacturers, we recommend a 66% diversity factor is applied to the MCB nominal rated current where it is intended to load the MCBs continuously (in excess of 1 hour).

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS FOR MCBs

l

MCB type

BS EN 60898 type

Instantaneous trip current range

Typical application

B

B

3–5In

Domestic

C

C

5–10In

Commercial Light Industrial

D

D

10–20In

General Industrial

1*

–

2.7–4In

Domestic

2*

–

4–7In

Commercial

3*

–

7–10In

General Industrial

* MCBs, type 1,2 & 3 to BS 3871

1,000

OPERATING TIME IN SECONDS

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

FAULT LEVELS

DEVICE

100

10

1.0

0.1 Type B

Type C

Type D

0.01 0.001 1

3

5

10

20

100

1,000

RMS PROSPECTIVE CURRENT AS A MULTIPLE OF RATED CURRENT

MCBs – STARBREAKER SPECIFICATION

l

3 Establishment of arc between fixed and moving s As the moving moves away from the fixed , an arc is established. The arc runs along the arc runner to the arc chamber where it is split up between the plates and extinguished. The low inertia and consequent high speed of the moving has a limiting effect on the flow of fault current. The rapid development of the arc, together with its accelerated extinction in the arc chamber, gives a typical operating time of 3.5–5 milliseconds.

l

British Standard BS EN 60898 Short circuit breaking capacity 6000A (M6) ● Type classification B (3–5In) ● Rated voltage 230V ● Rated frequency 50Hz ● ●

CURRENT LIMITING ACTION

APPLICATIONS

l

The Starbreaker single pole MCB with its Type B characteristics is suited for use on loads with little or no switching surges, such as occur on domestic applications. In addition, a Type B MCB will give indirect shock risk protection at higher levels of earth loop impedance (see tables on page 114). Other ratings are available in Type C classification (5–10In).

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

PAGE 108

CURRENT LIMITING EFFECT Maximum prospective fault current

l

Starbreaker MCBs are of the thermal-magnetic current limiting type, having a compact construction which has been achieved by not only minimising the number of parts but also the number of welded ts and connections. Critical material selection ensures reliability and durability. Typical of this is the choice of silver graphite for the fixed . The MCB has an easy to operate handle with a trip-free toggle mechanism – so even when the handle is held in the ‘on’ position the MCB is free to trip.

At 20°C 1.0

l

At 0°C 1.1

Adjacent thermal-magnetic MCBs should not be continuously loaded at or approaching their nominal rated currents when mounted in enclosures. It is good engineering practice to apply generous derating factors or make provision for adequate free air between devices. In these situations, and in common with other manufacturers, we recommend a 66% diversity factor is applied to the MCB nominal rated current where it is intended to load the MCBs continuously (in excess of 1 hour).

BACK-UP PROTECTION

20ms

l

Typical values of I2t energy let-through for Starbreaker MCBs are given in the table below: MCB rating Total I 2t let-through (A) (A2 sec)

MCB rating Total I 2t let-through (A) (A2 sec)

6

7500

20

23500

10

13000

32

33000

16

21500

40

40000 6000A

MOUNTING THE MCB l

l

l

In Crabtree consumer units Starbreaker MCBs are mounted on standard 35mm top hat rail to BS 5584: 1978 EN 50022 giving a projection within the Standard of 70mm. Due to the method of connection onto the busbar it is not possible to use the 61/B06 range for custom built s. Therefore the 610/06 range should be used (see page 91 for details).

TERMINALS

l

The MCB terminals are designed to accept copper cable up to 16mm2

It is desirable that the protective device nearest the fault should operate first. The low energy let through of Starbreaker MCBs provides better discrimination with HRC fuse back-up than is given by earlier types of MCBs.

METHOD OF OPERATION

20ms

Prospective short circuit test current

Back-up protection is required only if the prospective short circuit current at the point of installation exceeds the breaking capacity of the MCB. When providing back-up protection consideration must be given to discrimination between the MCB and fuse.

DISCRIMINATION

Healthy circuit current

I 2 t ENERGY LET-THROUGH

Starbreaker MCBs are calibrated to meet the requirements of BS EN 60898, 30°C Ref Calibration Temperature. At other temperatures the following rating factors should be used: At 60°C 0.9

l

Fault

l

1 Moderate overload conditions Detection of moderate overload conditions is achieved by the use of a thermo-metal element which deflects in response to the current ing through it. The thermo-metal element moves against the trip bar releasing the trip mechanism. 2 Short circuit conditions When the current flowing through the MCB reaches a predetermined level, the solenoid directly pulls in the plunger which forcibly separates the s and simultaneously releases the trip mechanism.

Starbreaker main switch ● Specification ● Rating ● Utilisation category ● Type ● Insulation voltage ● Impulse withstand voltage ● Rated duty ● Short-time withstand current ● Short-circuit making capacity ● Conditional short-circuit current ●

Pollution degree

100/MI2 BS EN 60947-3 100A 230V 50Hz AC-22A Double pole switch disconnector 250V 4kV Continuous 2kA for 1 second 3.5kA (peak) 16kA when protected by 100A HRC fuse to BS 1361 3

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CONSIDERATIONS

l

The high speed current limiting action ensures that the MCB operates before the full prospective fault current is allowed to develop. Under fault conditions, damage can be sustained to the installation and associated equipment due to the amount of energy that es before the current is completely interrupted. The total energy let-through depends on the value of current and the time for which it flows, and is denoted by the symbol I2t. The high speed current limiting action of Starbreaker MCBs ensures that the energy let-through and any subsequent damage is minimised. This reduced energy let-through assists greatly with both back-up and discrimination considerations.

115

RCDs – STARBREAKER & LIFESTAR

l

SPECIFICATION

l

BS EN 61008 RCCBs ● BS EN 61009 RCBOs ● BS 7288 SRCDs ● Range of current ratings ● Range of sensitivities ● Pole configurations

Lifestar RCCBs

●

13–100A 10–300mA DP and TP & N DP SRCD – 230V ● Voltage ratings 3 & 4 Module DP – 230V 4 Module TP & N – 400V 5 Module TP & N – 400V ● Frequency rating 50Hz ● Tripping principle employed Electro-mechanical

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

50mm2

l

Lifestar SRCDs

3 x 2.5mm2 3 x 4mm2 2 x 6mm2

Starbreaker RCBOs 10mm2

APPLICATIONS

l

Residual Current Devices (RCDs) may be required for one of two main reasons: (a) to ensure the compliance of an installation with BS 7671, formerly the IEE Wiring Regulations. An RCD may be installed to meet the requirements of Regulation 413-02-15 where a high earth fault loop impedance disqualifies the use of overcurrent protection devices as a means of providing protection against indirect . To comply with Regulation 413-02-16 the earth fault loop impedance in ohms multiplied by the rated tripping current of the RCD in amperes must not exceed 50. With the RCD having a sensitivity of 30mA, the maximum permissible earth fault loop impedance is calculated as follows: ZS (max)=50/0.03=1666 Ohms

Other voltage ratings available on request

OPERATION

116

TERMINAL CAPACITIES

Rated tripping current of RCD

Max permissible earth fault loop impedance

30mA 100mA 300mA

1666 Ohms 500 Ohms 166 Ohms

l

The RCD employs the current balance principle which involves the supply conductors to the load (phase and neutral) being wound onto a common transformer core to form the primary windings. The secondary winding of the current transformer is then connected to the trip mechanism, either an electromagnetic relay in the case of 3, 4 and 5 module RCCBs or an electronic relay in the case of Starbreaker, Lifestar and Lifestar SRCDs. Under healthy circuit conditions, the current in the phase conductor is equal to the current in the neutral and the vector sum of the current is zero. In the event of an earth fault, an amount of current will flow to earth, creating an out of balance situation in the transformer assembly. This out of balance is detected by the secondary winding of the transformer and at a pre-determined level of out of balance will activate the trip mechanism. Single phase and neutral or three phase and neutral units (suitable for 3 or 4 wire systems) are available, the latter being suitable for balanced or unbalanced 3 phase loads. The RCD trip mechanism will operate at a residual current of between 50–100% of its rating tripping current (sensitivity). 1/2 3/4 5/6

N

Tripping Device Test button (interlocked)

Current balance transformer

Test resistor

Note Exposed installation metal work must be earthed. When used on 3 wire 230V systems a link should be connected between L and N.

SENSITIVITIES

N

RCD circuit diagram (four pole) Note Exposed installation metal work must be earthed.

1/2 3/4

Tripping Device Test button (interlocked)

Current balance transformer Test resistor

Fault sensing winding

2/1 4/3

RCD circuit diagram (two pole)

TRANSIENT EARTH LEAKAGE CURRENTS

TEST BUTTON

All Crabtree residual current devices incorporate a high level of immunity to tripping when subjected to transient earth leakage currents. Such transients can occur when there is a significant level of capacitance to earth as can result from cable capacitance (particularly MICC) or RF filter networks. Crabtree RCDs are therefore less susceptible to nuisance tripping due to transient earth leakage currents.

A test button is provided on all RCDs to enable the operation of the device to be checked. It is recommended that an RCD is tested at least quarterly. (See BS 7671 Regulation 514-12-02).

l

The choice of RCD depends upon the application of the level of protection required. 300mA provide the means to achieve compliance with BS 7671 in conditions of poor earth loop impedance and also give a good level of fire risk protection. 100mA provide the means to achieve compliance with BS 7671, a high level of fire risk protection and a degree of indirect shock risk protection. 30mA for use where a higher level of protection is required, with portable equipment or equipment used in hazardous conditions. Regulation 471-16-01 of BS 7671 indicates that where a socket outlet may reasonably be expected to supply equipment to be used outside the zone, protection shall be afforded by a residual current device having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA. Regulation 471-16-02 also contains a requirement for circuits supplying portable equipment outdoors supplied other than through a socket outlet. 10mA provide a higher level of personal protection, for use in sensitive areas such as laboratories, schools and workshops where potential hazards exist from electrical faults caused through misuse, accidental damage or failure of electrical appliances.

Fault sensing winding

2/1 4/3 6/5

(b) to provide a higher level of protection than that given by direct earthing, against fire or shock risks caused by earth leakage currents. Overcurrent protection devices cannot detect earth fault currents below their operating current. If they are the only means of earth fault protection, it is possible for sufficient earth fault current to flow undetected to constitute a fire risk. By using an RCD, the flow of the sustained earth fault current, above the tripping current of the RCD, is prevented. The shock risk associated with these earth fault currents is also greatly reduced. To provide complete personnel protection, a high sensitivity RCD to a Type A classification with a maximum tripping current of 30mA should be used. This is particularly important with portable appliances where there is a danger of losing earth continuity due to damage or fatigue. Residual current devices are completely selective in their operation. They are unaffected by parallel earth paths and are thus ideally suitable for the protection of installations in modern high density dwellings or office blocks. They are virtually tamperproof and provide a predetermined level of protection. Even if earthing conditions deteriorate substantially, they will continue to provide a higher level of protection than would have been given by direct earthing. Starbreaker 100A plug in rcd’s are recommended for use in larger capacity enclosures, for further advice consult our Technical Department.

l

l

RCBOs (MCB/RCDs) & RCDs – GENERAL

l

SPECIFICATION

l

STARBREAKER RCBOs (MCB/RCD) ● Standard ● Short circuit breaking capacity ● Current rating ● Type classification ● Sensitivities ● Rated voltage ● Rated frequency ● Tripping principle employed ● Pole configurations

BS EN 61009 6000A (M6) 6–50A B 10mA & 30mA 230V 50Hz Electronic Single pole with solid neutral

LIFESTAR RCBOs comply with BS 3871/4293.

APPLICATIONS

l

RCBOs provide both earth fault and overcurrent protection. The MCB element of the Starbreaker unit has a Type B (3–5In) classification making the device more suitable for domestic or light commercial applications. RCBOs with other MCB classifications are available to order. All RCBOs give a high level of protection to individual circuits whilst exhibiting improved immunity to response caused by transients. Lifestar RCBOs are for use on Starbreaker consumer units pre July 1992 and are also suitable for separate sale enclosure mounting.

INSTALLATION TESTING – CAUTION

FAULT CURRENT SENSITIVITY

l

Semi-conductor devices are now incorporated in equipment used throughout industry, commerce and in the home. Typically, the purpose of these semiconductor devices is for monitoring and controlling industrial equipment eg speed controls for small motors and temperature controls, along with extensive use in computers, VDUs, printers, washing machines, etc. As the equipment is fed from the mains electrical supply, in the event of an earth fault the presence of semi-conductors may result in the normal ac waveform being replaced by a non-sinusoidal fault current. In some cases the waveform may be rectified or chopped. These waveforms are said to contain a pulsating dc component which can either partially desensitise or totally disable a standard Type AC RCD. New International standards IEC 1008 (RCCBs) and IEC 1009 (RCBOs) divide RCDs into two performance classes: Type AC RCDs for which tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents, whether suddenly applied or slowly arising. Type A RCDs for which tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents and residual pulsating direct currents, whether suddenly applied or slowly arising. To ensure the correct level of protection, check for the following symbols: TYPE AC normal ac sensitivity

l

TYPE A pulsating dc sensitivity

Crabtree RCDs are available as both Type AC and Type A devices.

IEC PUBLICATION (479) CURVES WITH CRABTREE RCD CHARACTERISTICS SUPERIMPOSED

l

TIME/CURRENT ZONES OF EFFECTS OF AC CURRENT (15–100Hz) ON PERSONS Zone Physiological effects a

10,000

b

c1 c2

IEC 479

c3

1

Usually no reaction effects.

2

Usually no harmful physiological effects.

3

Usually no organic damage to be expected. Likelihood of muscular contraction and difficulty of breathing, reversible disturbances of formation and conduction of impulses in the heart, and transient cardiac arrest without ventricular fibrillation increases with current magnitude and time.

5,000

Time in milliseconds

2000 1000 500

1

2

3

4

200 100 50

20 10 0.1

0.2 0.3 0.5

1

2

3

5

10

Current in milliamperes (RMS) 30mA

100mA

20 30

50

100

200 300 500 1,000 2,000 3,000 5,000 10,000

Typical current Limits due to body resistance at 230V

4

In addition to the effects of zone 3, probability of ventricular fibrillation increased up to 5% (Curve C2) up to 50% (Curve C3) and above 50% beyond Curve C3. Increasing with magnitude and time, pathyphysiological effects such as cardiac arrest, breathing arrest and heavy burns may occur.

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

As Starbreaker RCBOs employ electronic components they should be disconnected when carrying out the following tests on the electrical installation: (a) Earth fault loop impedance test The load terminals should be disconnected if it is intended to parallel-out the unit for test purposes. It may incur damage if mains potential is maintained on the load terminals of this unit after the trip mechanism has operated. (b) Insulation test Whilst RCBOs can withstand the effects of normal insulation testers without damage, false readings may be given on the test instrument. For this reason it is recommended that the device is disconnected during this test.

117

STARBREAKER CONSUMER UNIT APPLICATIONS

l

The following information illustrates the methods by which consumer units can be installed into more specific applications, for example multi-tariff or dual RCCB consumer units. To assist product selection we have included references of the components required in order to assemble the particular variant.

TWIN-TARIFF

l

Twin-tariff combines two independent supplies typically the standard domestic supply and the supply for storage heaters. This installation can be housed within one standard enclosure thus saving space and installation time. Supply diagram

Internal wiring diagram

N

MAIN SWITCH

HEATING CONTROL METER

N

MAIN SWITCH

STANDARD METER

N

L

N

MAIN SWITCH

L

MAIN SWITCH

N

N

SERVICE CUT OUT FUSE 100A

INCOMING SUPPLY

SPLIT-LOAD DUAL-TARIFF

l

Combining the added safety of a split-load RCCB and the economy heating tariff into one combined unit offers an all-round saving of space and installation time.

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

Supply diagram

118

Internal wiring diagram

N

HEATING CONTROL METER

MAIN SWITCH

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

N

N

MAIN SWITCH N

STANDARD METER

L

N N

MAIN SWITCH

L

MAIN SWITCH

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

N

N

N

SERVICE CUT OUT FUSE 100A

INCOMING SUPPLY

MULTI-TARIFF

l

Multi-tariff heating provides 3 tariffs catering for total heating applications: 1 Direct heating appliances 2 Bottom immersion heater 3 Storage heating Supply diagram

Internal wiring diagram RADIO TELESWITCH

N

N

N

TO STANDARD CONSUMER UNIT

STANDARD METER

HEATING CONTROL METER

MAIN SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

N

L

MAIN SWITCH

1

2

N

L

MAIN SWITCH

N

L

MAIN SWITCH

3 N

N

N

SERVICE CUT OUT FUSE 100A

INCOMING SUPPLY

NOTE 15 module enclosures will accommodate this facility, however the enclosure is not fitted with three neutral bars. In this instance the bottom immersion heater neutral should be connected directly to the bottom neutral terminal on the appropriate main switch.

STARBREAKER CONSUMER UNIT APPLICATIONS

l

DUAL RCCB

l

This type of configuration combines the benefit of both100mA RCCB protection for lighting and 30mA RCCB protection for personal safety. Furthermore each RCCB will operate totally independent from each other. The main switch provides total isolation of the entire consumer unit. It is necessary to use the main incoming device fitted with the additional terminal to provide the independent supply to the second RCCB. Internal wiring diagram

N

N

N

N

L N

MAIN SWITCH

N

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

L

N

L RCCB

N

N

TWO BANK

l

Two bank consumer units provide the facility to offer a wide range of configurations for applications which demand increased numbers of circuits. Continuity of supply between the top and bottom banks (where required) can be achieved by utilising the main switch with the additional terminal. Supply and internal wiring diagrams

N

N

N

L

N

N

MAIN SWITCH

N

N

N

N

L N

MAIN SWITCH

L N

MAIN SWITCH

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

N

L

N

N

N

N

N

L

N

N

N

N

L

N

RCCB

N

N

17, 23, or 33 way Dual RCCB

17, 23, or 33 way Split-load Bottom bank is fed via the direct connection unit 100/DC2 N

N

N

N

N

N L

L N

N

MAIN SWITCH

L

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

N

MAIN SWITCH

SPLIT LOAD RCCB

N

L

RCCB

N

N

N

N

N

N

L

L

N

20, 26, or 36 way Split-load

N

N

RCCB

N

N

N

L

N

N N

N

L

MAIN SWITCH

N

L

MAIN SWITCH

N

L

N

N

L

Top bank 7, 10 or 15 way Split-load Bottom bank 6, 9 or 14 way Multi-tariff

N

N

L

N

L

MAIN SWITCH MAIN SWITCH

N

N

N

N

Top bank 8 or 13 way Dual RCCB Bottom bank 9 or 14 way Multi-tariff

MAIN SWITCH

N

MAIN SWITCH

N

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C I R C U I T P R O T E C T I O N

N

N

119

CONTROL MODULES – GENERAL ANALOGUE TIME SWITCHES

303/TQ7 7 day

–

150hr

150hr

Setting interval

15 min

15 min

1hr

Minimum switching

30 min

45 min

4hr

rating at 240V ac

16A

16A

16A

●

Changeover s. Manual override.

●

Clear switch position indicator.

l

LIST Nos 302/TD1 1

Channel

302/TD2 2

Switching programme

24hr/7 day

24hr/7 day

Power reserve

250hr

250hr

Minimum setting

1 min

1 min

rating resistive at 240V ac

16A

2 x 16A

Accuracy at 20°C

±1 sec/day

±1 sec/day

Power consumption

8.5VA

8.5VA

Holiday programme

1– 45 days

1– 47 days

Standard

VDE0875

VDE0875

Memory locations

42

24

Every day programme switchings per week

294

168

Permissible ambient temperature

-10–+50°C -10–+45°C

● ● ●

L

Permanent ‘on/off’. Summer/Winter time changes. Manual override.

● ●

3

8

MCB 6A max

MCB 16A max

LOAD

L

Analogue Typical wiring diagram

●

C1

1

C2

2

3

● ●

5

MCB 16A max

LOAD

LOAD

M

6

L

N

MCB 6A

N

Digital 2 channel Typical wiring diagram

Retractive switches

Timed lights

3

l

P

3

N

4

Switch with neon

L1 (P) N

Staircase 3 wire Typical wiring diagram

4-lead rising mains Timed, reswitchable lighting. Untimed, standard lighting switches.

Normal lighting

Retractive switches

Timed lights

4

l

16/240 2000W 2000W

Operating voltage: Primary 240V 50/60Hz; Secondary 4/8/12V. ● Short circuit resistance is in accordance with IEC 742. Power: 5VA.

TWILIGHT SWITCH

MCB 6A

L1

It is important to note that when this unit is installed with other 240 or 415V equipment, ensure secondary connections use cable with insulation rated for 240/415V duty, or use additional insulation (sleeving etc) to provide appropriate insulation. L1 (P) N

l

Operating voltage 190–240V Mains frequency 45–60Hz Power consumption 2.2VA rating resistive @ 240V 10A Incandescent lamp load 1000W Brightness range 2–2000 lux Switching delay (on/off) 80 seconds approx Switching status indication LED (no delay) Connection cable for light sensor 2 core cable max length 100m Permissible ambient temp -10 to +50°C control -40 to +70°C unit control light Protection category IP20 unit IP54 sensor ●

Can be wired normally open or closed.

●

Selector switch for adjustment of ranges: range 1 2–35 lux; range 2 35–2000 lux. Connection of additional timing device will provide facility to override ‘switch on’ status.

●

4

MCB 16A max

Synchronous motor. ● Time range 1–7 minutes. ● Glow lamp max 50mA. Override switch for permanent ‘on’. ● Pre-selector switch for 3-4 wire connection.

BELL TRANSFORMER

MCB 16A max

Digital 1 channel Typical wiring diagram

MCB 16A max

Switching capacity 16A resistive, 2000W tungsten, 2000W fluorescent

●

3

L N

Daily and weekly programmes. Changeover s.

50–60Hz

Connection: 3-lead rising mains Timed, reswitchable lighting.

OFF

2

1

LOAD

Operating voltage 190–240V Mains frequency

M

ON

M

2

1

If the timers are used in combination with other devices within a system it is important to check that the entire system does not cause adverse interference. In the event that the ambient temperature exceeds those stated above, temporary fading of the display may occur. This does not affect the time-keeping or switching functions of the device.

STAIRCASE TIME SWITCH

N

7

N

DIGITAL TIME SWITCHES

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C O N T R O L M O D U L E S

303/TQ24 24hr

Power reserve

●

120

l

LIST Nos 303/TS24 24hr

Time period

l

●

Delay ‘on/off’ eliminates nuisance switching.

P

3

N

4

Switch with neon

MCB 16A max

Staircase 4 wire Typical wiring diagram

SENSOR

M

1

2

3

L N LOAD

Twilight switch Typical wiring diagram

L

N

4

5

SILENT OPERATION INSTALLATION ORS

These DIN rail mounted ors with silent operation are ideal for mounting in consumer units destined for either residential or commercial dwellings where quiet running is a priority. Suitable for heating, lighting, air conditioning, motors and similar equipment.

l

TYPE

Thermal Rating per Pole AC1(A)

CIK22

20

1.3 (N / 0 only)

–

2 1 0

0 1 2

CIK22-20 CIK22-11 CIK22-02

CIK24

24

2.2

4

4 3 2 0

0 1 2 4

CIK24-40 CIK24-31 CIK24-22 CIK24-04

CIK40

40

5.5

11

4 3 2 0

0 1 2 4

CIK40-40 CIK40-31 CIK40-22 CIK40-04

CIK63

63

8.5

15

4 3 2 0

0 1 2 4

CIK63-40 CIK63-31 CIK63-22 CIK63-04

230V Auxiliary s

Motor Rating AC3 (kW) 230V 400V

Pole Configuration N/O N/C

LIST No

400V AC15

6

4

–

–

1 2

1 0

CHHSLA11 CHHSLA20

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LAMPS PER POLE TYPE Incandescent lamps

Energy saving lamps

Low pressure sodium-vapour lamps (uncompensated)

High pressure sodium-vapour lamps (uncompensated)

Low pressure sodium-vapour lamps (compensated)

High pressure sodium-vapour lamps (compensated)

Fluorescent lamps (uncompensated) Fluorescent lamps (compensated) Fluorescent lamps (dual fitted) Fluorescent lamps with electronic starting device AC - operation

CIK24 25 15 7 3 1 15 15 15 10 5 3 2 1 6 6 4 3 3 12 10 7 5 3 2 – 1 1 1 – – 3 3 2 1 1 – – 24 20 13 8 8 5 2 x 48 2 x 24 2 x 15 30 16 12 32 16 10

CIK40 65 40 20 8 4 100 100 100 70 15 10 6 3 13 13 9 6 6 24 20 16 10 6 4 2 10 10 8 4 4 22 18 18 10 6 4 2 90 65 40 45 45 25 2 x 100 2 x 65 2 x 40 60 30 22 40 20 10

CIK63 85 50 25 10 5 150 150 150 70 20 13 8 4 20 20 14 9 9 38 30 25 16 10 6 3 16 16 12 7 7 33 27 27 16 9 7 3 140 95 60 70 70 43 2 x 150 2 x 95 2 x 60 80 42 30 48 26 18

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C O N T R O L M O D U L E S

Halogen lamps

60W 100W 200W 500W 1000W 7W 11W 15W 20W 200W 300W 500W 1000W 35W 55W 90W 135W 180W 50W 70W 110W 150W 250W 400W 1000W 35W 55W 90W 135W 180W 50W 70W 110W 150W 250W 400W 1000W 18W 36W 58W 18W 36W 58W 18W 36W 58W 1 x 18W 1 x 36W 1 x 58W 2 x 18W 2 x 36W 2 x 58W

CIK22 21 13 7 3 1 10 10 5 3 – – – – 5 5 3 2 3 12 10 8 6 3 2 1 1 1 – – – 3 2 2 1 – – – 24 17 10 6 6 4 2 x 22 2 x 17 2 x 10 22 12 8 23 12 7

Dimensions – see page 132

121

DIMENSIONS page WIRING ACCESSORIES PVC TRUNKING CIRCUIT PROTECTION

122

123-126 127 128-132

CUT-OUT DETAILS

l

CAPITAL 13A SINGLE SOCKET OUTLET INTERIORS List No

*A* B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

L

M

N

P

4314/1 60.3 12.0 15.4 5.7 28.6 30.4 10.8 38.8 14.2 38.4 –

–

–

–

l

N

60.3 50.0

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

8255/1 60.3 19.8 14.3 38.9 38.4 14.3 –

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

R1.0

M

C

CL

P J

4314/13 60.3 12.0 15.4 5.7 28.6 30.4 10.8 38.8 14.2 38.4 23.4 16.8 16.6 10.5 7259

A

R0.7

E

L K D

J

* Fixing holes drill to accept 4mm countersunk screws.

G B H 4314/1 & 4314/13

R1.5

Max thickness 1.6mm (except 7259 – 2.5mm).

A F

F

R1.5 B A E

B

C D

7259

8255/1

CAPITAL 13A TWIN SOCKET OUTLET INTERIORS List No

*A* B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

L

M

N

4316/1 120.6 84.4 24.7 14.2 38.8 38.4 30.4 28.6 29.9 –

–

–

–

l

N

4316/13 120.6 84.4 24.7 14.2 38.8 38.4 30.4 28.6 29.9 23.4 94.1 16.6 10.5 8257/1 120.6 66.7 19.8 14.3 38.9 38.4 –

–

–

–

–

–

A L B J

M

D

H

K

–

* Fixing holes drill to accept 4mm countersunk screws. C

Max thickness 1.6mm.

F

G

D E

CL

*A* B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

A

L

M

N

L

P

R

S

J

D

R1.0

R1.6

P

C

4522/13 120.6 21.7 40.2 14.2 38.8 38.4 7.6 30.2 17.0 10.0 40.5 41.6 19.2 5.0 Q

M G

B

4522/1 120.6 21.7 40.2 14.2 38.8 38.4 7.6 30.2 17.0 10.0 40.5 41.6 19.2 5.0 List No

R1.6

K

F

T

T

N

D

4522/13 21.5 10.5 16.6 25.75 E

R

* Fixing holes drill to accept 3.5mm countersunk screws.

R0.7

Q

Max thickness 1.6mm.

CAPITAL 13A FUSED CONNECTION UNIT INTERIORS List No

*A* B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

4831/1 60.3 22.0 38.0 –

–

–

–

–

–

–

4832/1 60.3 48.0 38.0 –

–

–

–

–

–

–

4832/13 60.3 48.0 38.0 –

–

–

R0.7 l

K

R

CL

H

J

S

R0.7

A B

G C D

23.4 16.8 16.6 10.5

4836/1 60.3 22.0 38.0 29.0 17.0 14.0 –

–

–

–

F

4837/1 60.3 48.0 38.0 29.0 17.0 14.0 –

–

–

–

R0.7

R2.0 F E

4837/13 60.3 48.0 38.0 29.0 17.0 14.0 23.4 16.8 16.6 10.5 * Fixing holes drill to accept 4mm countersunk screws. Max thickness 1.6mm.

CAPITAL TELEPHONE & CO-AXIAL OUTLETS List No *A* B C D 8283/1 60.3 20.3 23.3 16.2 8284/1 60.3 20.3 23.3 16.2 * Fixing holes drill to accept 3.5mm * countersunk screws. Max. thickness 1.7mm.

List No 8265/1

*A* B

C

60.3 21

30

B

l

8266/1 60.3 41 30 * Fixing holes drill to accept 4mm

B C

C D A

R1.5

A

countersunk screws. Max. thickness 1.6mm.

8283/1 & 8284/1

8265/1 & 8266/1

R3.0

H

DIMENSIONS WIRING ACCESSORIES

CAPITAL 45A DP ‘SLIMLINE’ COOKER CONTROL UNIT INTERIORS l List No

R0.7

R1.0

All dimensions in mm. General tolerance ±0.13mm. These dimensions are a guideline only, more detailed drawings are available upon request.

123

CUT-OUT DETAILS

l

CAPITAL 10AX/20A/32A SWITCH INTERIORS List No

*A* B

All 1 gang

60.3 17.1 30.6

C

6172/1

60.3 33.4 30.6

6173/1

60.3 49.7 30.6

4011/1 & 4012/1

60.3 17.1 30.6

D

E

A F

A

l

F

E

B R0.7

D C

C –

–

–

R1.0 B

R1.0

4011/13 & 4012/13 60.3 17.1 30.6 23.7 10.5 16.6 * Fixing holes drill to accept 4mm countersunk screws.

6172/1 & 6173/1

4011/1 & 4012/1 4011/13 & 4012/13

Max thickness 2.5mm.

CAPITAL 50A DP SWITCHES

R3.0

B l

List No *A* B C D 4512/1 52 31 61.3 38.5

D

4512/1 & 4512/13

C

4512/13 52 31 61.3 38.5 * Fixing holes drill to accept 3.5mm countersunk screws. Max thickness 2.5mm.

A

CAPITAL 2A ROUND PIN SOCKET OUTLETS

60.3 CL

l

List No 8075/1

11.9 Dia

12.6

* Fixing holes drill to accept 3.5mm countersunk screws. Max thickness 1.6mm.

2 holes 10.4 Dia

CAPITAL 5A ROUND PIN SOCKET OUTLETS

l

DIMENSIONS WIRING ACCESSORIES

List No 2240/1 * Fixing holes drill to accept 3.5mm countersunk screws.

14.3 Dia

0.4 Dia

20.0

19.0 60.3 7.1

Max thickness 1.6mm.

2.7

2 holes 12.1 Dia

9.1

5.8

19 29.6

CAPITAL 15A ROUND PIN SOCKET OUTLETS

30.9 l

7.6

List No 2272/1 * Fixing holes drill to accept 3.5mm countersunk screws.

12.7 21.8 25.6

Max thickness 1.6mm. 25.4 3 holes 15.9 Dia

24.6 60.3

ROCKERGRID TOGGLE SWITCH PLATES

A

List No 6551/_ _ – 1 gang

A A

B

16.00 Dia Hole Detail B

B l

For Rockergrid switches and accessories, single screw fixing to grid, second fixing hole facilitates mounting if required. Extra screws to order. A B C D

= = = =

B

15.15 15.05

Max thickness 1.6mm.

Dimensions

A B

6552/_ _ – 2 gang * Fixing holes drill to accept 3.5mm countersunk screws.

ROCKERGRID CUT OUT DETAILS

60.3 25.65

60.3 l

40mm 18mm 35mm 3mm

These dimensions are a guideline only, more detailed drawings are available upon request.

124

14.5

2 holes 3.048mm dia countersunk to 5.08mm dia at 90° (for 6BA screw) and alternatively tap 6BA

C

D

A

CUT-OUT DETAILS

l

PLATINUM 13A SINGLE SOCKET OUTLET

l

List No A* B C D E F G H I J K 1314/1 38.4 50.0 12.0 13.8 18.7 14.4 13.8 24.5 38.0 28.5 20.0

L

M

N

P

-

-

-

-

P N

1314/13 38.4 50.0 12.0 13.8 18.7 14.4 13.8 24.5 38.0 28.5 20.0 19.65 10.30 16.30 33.15

D C

B

F

E

M

J K

L R1.50

H G A

PLATINUM 13A TWIN SOCKET OUTLET List No

A* B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

1316/1

110 38.4 13.8 24.5 38.0 28.5 20.0 29.0 13.8

l

J

K

L

-

-

-

M M H

L

1316/13 110 38.4 13.8 24.5 38.0 28.5 20.0 29.0 13.8 20.15 10.3 16.3 127.3



K

F G

J R1.50

E D C

A

B

List No A* B C D E F 1832/1 27.7 30.5 1.50 17.75 6.20 14.60

l

G

H

I

J

K

-

-

-

-

50.0

K

1832/13 27.7 30.5 1.50 17.75 6.20 14.60 24.8 10.2 16.2 25.0 50.0

J H G AB

C D

PLATINUM 10AX / 6A TP ISOLATOR SWITCH

E

F

l

List No A* B C D 1170/1 50.0 16.5 30.0 1096/1 50.0 16.5 30.0

-

1172/1 50.0 32.8 30.0

-

1173/1

-

49.5 30.0 55.8

1017/1

-

49.5 30.0 55.8

B A B

C

D

DIMENSIONS WIRING ACCESSORIES

PLATINUM 13A FUSED CONNECTION UNIT

These dimensions are a guideline only, more detailed drawings are available upon request.

125

Technical Data

D I M E N S I O N S L U M I N A I R E D I S T R I B U T I O N B O X E S & PAT C H PA N E L S

LDB DIMENSION DETAILS

126

A

List No.

Height A

Width B

Depth C

5020/3 5020/4 5020/5 5020/7

180 180 180 180

245 300 366 445

70 70 70 70

8 way 5021/3 5021/4 5021/5 5021/7

180 180 180 180

245 300 366 445

70 70 70 70

10 way 5022/3 5022/4 5022/5 5022/7

180 180 180 180

245 300 366 445

70 70 70 70

6 way

C

B

All dimensions are approximate and in mm. Please allow for clearance of approximately 8mm for interior 21mm for the LSC plug when inserted.

Commercial and office layouts may require frequent modification to the lighting requirements and the LDB can provide a cost effective solution when a number of units are connected through a lighting system. Light fittings can be conveniently un-plugged and re-connected into another LDB at a different point of the lighting circuit to provide optimum light and maximum flexibility. A lighting system utilising LDBs with 4 pin interiors offers an emergency light circuit at every point but allows a 3 pin LSC plug to connect to offer standard lighting. This can also be acheived with the 5 and 7 pin interiors as the 3 pin LSC plug fits all interiors. Other configurations of LDB are available on request.

PATCH S 465

32

18 way

24 way

76

48 way

50 mm

50 mm 42 mm

42 mm

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS, WARWICK 1 l Profile assembly includes: • Base Unit • 2 x Angled Covers

85 mm

212 mm

• 1 x Angled Cover • 2 x Main Covers

42 mm

50 mm

Overall Size: • 212mm x 50mm

Overall Size: • 170mm x 50mm

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS, WARWICK 2 l

50 mm 42 mm

42 mm

85 mm

85 mm

Profile assembly includes: • Base Unit • 1 x Base Extension

• 1 x Main Cover 170 mm

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS, WARWICK 4 l

Profile assembly includes: • Base Unit • 1 x Angled Cover

Profile assembly includes: • Base Unit • 2 x Square Covers

85 mm 42 mm

170 mm

• 1 x Main Cover

Overall Size: • 170mm x 50mm

212 mm

85 mm 85 mm

42 mm

85 mm

170 mm

42 mm

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS, WARWICK 3 l

• 1 x Square Cover • 2 x Main Covers

Overall Size: • 212mm x 50mm

D I M E N S I O N S WA R W I C K M O D U L A R P V C

50 mm

Overall Size: • 170mm x 50mm

Profile assembly includes: • Base Unit • 1 x Base Extension

• 1 x Main Cover • 1 x Square Cover

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS, WARWICK 5 l

127

APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS (mm)

l

SURFACE ALL-INSULATED ENCLOSURES List No

A

B

C

404/0A

160

117

102

406/0A

230

190

120

409/0A

230

243

120

412/0A

230

294

120

415/0A

230

344

120

420/0A

230

439

120

l

A

B

C

SURFACE METAL-CASED ENCLOSURES List No

A

B

C

804/0A

210

117

121

806/0A

210

188

121

809/0A

210

241

121

812/0A

210

292

121

815/0A

210

353

121

820/0A

210

438

121

l

A

T E C H N I C A L D ATA S TA R B R E A K E R

C

128

FLUSH METAL-CASED ENCLOSURES List No

A

B

C

809/0AF

250

281

121

812/0AF

250

332

121

815/0AF

250

393

121

820/0AF

250

478

121

B

l

A

C

B

APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS (mm)

l

2 BANK SURFACE METAL CASED ENCLOSURES List No

A

B

C

824/2A

450

292

121

830/2A

450

353

121

840/2A

450

438

121

l

A

C

CUSTOM BUILT CONSUMER UNITS List No

A

B

C

D

E

F

814/13

230

505

115

175

450

25

829/2463

480

505

115

410

450

25

832/24

480

505

115

410

450

25

B

l

F

D A

The above are Starbreaker interiors mounted in a Crabtree Polestar style enclosure – available to order.

E C

List No 915/0M

A

B

C

D

E

152

335

100

85

319

A

* Allow 4mm for dolly clearance.

C

B

D

E B

SPINE BACKPLATE ASSEMBLIES (WHITE PVC COVER) l List No 915/0W

A

B

C

D

E

220.5

335

100

85

319

* Allow 4mm for dolly clearance.

C

A D

T E C H N I C A L D ATA S TA R B R E A K E R

SPINE BACKPLATE ASSEMBLIES (METAL COVER) l

B

E

129

APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS (mm)

l

13A 1 & 2 GANG SRCD (SAFETY SOCKET) List No

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

l

Q

J

K

4414/A10 -

120.6 39.75 28.45 14.2

38.8

38.4

51.8

56.6 20.85 56.6

4416/A10 -

120.6

79.5 28.45 14.2

38.8

38.4

72.8

27.3 20.85 113.1

Q

R

L 18.9 12.9

M

N

13.9 32.7 13.9 32.7

O

P

31.8

7.4

63.5

M R

14.5

4414/A10 -

O

S

14.5 31.48 43.15

7.4

S

H

–

R1.60 R0.35

J G

–

N

R1.00

P

L CL

F K O

Q

H

R1.60 D

M

C

E

R0.35

K P

R1.60

L

N

D

J

B A

R1.00 CL G F

C

R1.60

D

4416/A10 -

CL

E

B D

A

2 MODULE RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS List No

A

B

C

223/A010

90

35

75

224/ - - -, 226/ - - -, 228/ - - -

90

35

75

224/A - - -, 226/A - - -, 228/A - - -

90

35

75

L

l

A

C

T E C H N I C A L D ATA L I F E S TA R

4 MODULE RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS List No

A

B

C

244/ - - -, 246/ - - -,241/ - - -

90

70

75

244/A - - -, 246/A - - -,241/A - - -

90

70

75

B

l

A

C

5 MODULE RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS List No

A

B

*C*

D

E

F

G

H

641/ - - -

198

98

99

104

–

116

88

50

641/A - - -

198

98

99

104

–

116

88

50

l

F

D A

* Allow 4mm for dolly clearance.

G B

H C

2 MODULE RCBOs (MCB/RCDs) List No

A

B

*C*

D

E

6132/0 - 0

87

36

75

45

50

l

A D E

* Allow 4mm for dolly clearance. C

These dimensions are a guideline only, more detailed drawings are available upon request.

130

B

B

APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS (mm)

l

3 MODULE GENERAL PURPOSE ENCLOSURE P20 List No

A

B

*C*

D

E

744/3

150

60

89

68

38

l

E

D

* Allow 4mm for dolly clearance. A

B

C

3 MODULE ALL-PURPOSE ENCLOSURE P65 List No CBE3

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

160

85

114

140

65

69

96

l

E

F

DA

C

4 MODULE GENERAL PURPOSE ENCLOSURES P20 List No

A

B

*C*

D

E

744/4

150

77

105

68

56

744/41

210

77

105

68

56

l

B

G

D

E

A

* Allow 4mm for dolly clearance.

B

C

List No CBE4

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

160

110

114

140

90

69

96

l

E

F

DA

C

4 & 5 MODULE FABRICATED STEEL ENCLOSURE P20 List No

A

B

C

D

E

844/4

223

112

66

184

73

EN100

412

340

115

305

229

B

G

l

D A

C

E B

T E C H N I C A L D ATA L I F E S TA R

4 MODULE ALL-PURPOSE ENCLOSURE P65

131

APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS (mm) TIME SWITCHES LIST No

l

l

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

L

303/TS24

90

54

66

45

60

46

–

–

–

–

–

303/TQ24

90

54

66

45

60

46

–

–

–

–

–

303/TQ7

90

54

66

45

60

46

–

–

–

–

–

302/TD1

86

36

66

45

60

40

–

–

–

–

–

302/TD2

86

36

66

45

60

40

–

–

–

–

–

E

Analogue

A

D

Digital

G

B

F

Staircase 301/S7

84

18

70

BELL TRANSFORMER

45

60

43

25

–

–

–

–

C

l

LIST No

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

L

303/B12

90

36

59

45

53

44

45

78

–

–

–

E

D

H A

F

G B

T E C H N I C A L D ATA C O N T R O L M O D U L E S

C

132

ORS & IMPULSE RELAYS

l

LIST No

A

B

C

D

E

F

CIK22-20

84

17.5

65.5

45

60

48.5

CIK24-31

84

35

65.5

45

60

48.5

CIK24-40

84

35

65.5

45

60

48.5

CIK40-22

84

53.5

65.5

45

60

48.5

CIK40-31

84

53.5

65.5

45

60

48.5

CIK63-31

84

53.5

65.5

45

60

48.5

CIK63-40

84

53.5

65.5

45

60

48.5

301/161

84

18

59

45

53

44

301/162

84

18

59

45

53

44

301/16CO

84

18

59

45

53

44

TWILIGHT SWITCH

E

A

D

F

B

C

l

LIST No

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

L

303/P2

86

54

66

45

60

46

116

61

27

25

–

C B

E

J

D G

F

K H

A

NUMERICAL INDEX WIRING ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION BOXES & SERVICE ITEMS CIRCUIT PROTECTION PVC TRUNKING

133

WIRING ACCESSORIES List No 13NP & 13NPRD

Page No

List No

Page No

List No

Page No

3420

17

4404/A01 & 4404/A03

4

4535/7_ _

26

59

3422

17

4406/A01 & 4406/A03

4

4535/9_ _

47, 48, 49

1011/13_ _

23, 25

3432

17

4414/A01 & 4414/A03

34

4550

1011/1_ _

23, 25

3442

17

4414/A01BG & 4414/A03BG

54

4550/6_ _

27

1012/13_ _

23, 25

3442/CFL

17

4414/A101 & 4414/A103

63

4550/7_ _

26

1012/1_ _

23, 25

3443

18

4416/A01 & 4416/A03

34

4550/9_ _

49

1017/1_ _

22, 24

3450

17

4416/A01BG & 4416/A03BG

54

4550/9_ _

1075/1_ _

22, 24

3450/9

17

4416/A101 & 4416/A103

63

4551

1091/1 7575/_ _ 8585/_ _ 1092/1

23, 25, 72

3450/9CFL

17

4424/A01 & 4424/A03

33

4551/ELT

23

3450/CFL

17

4424/A01BG & 4424/A03BG

54

4552

25

3462/BK & 3462/WH

18

4425

49

4552/9_ _

23, 25, 72

3463/BK & 3463/WH

18

4426/A01 & 4426/A03

33

4553

54

4553/9_ _

7577/_ _

23

3809BG

55

4426/A01BG & 4426/A03BG

8577/_ _

25

3899BG

55

4430

47, 48, 60

48 47, 48 47 47, 48 47 54

4587/BG

55

4001 – 4004

1170/1_ _

25, 25

1172/1_ _

23, 25

1173/1_ _

23, 25

4011/3_ _

35, 41

4435

47, 48

1240/1_ _

22, 24

4011/_ _

35, 41

4436

47, 48, 60

1250W/_ _

35, 42

4012/1 & 4012/13

65

4440

49

1272/1_ _

22, 24

4012/3_ _

35, 41

4450

47, 48, 60

1314/13_ _

22, 24

4013/3

1314/1_ _

22, 24

4014/3_ _

5

4430/6_ _

4009

14

4430/7_ _

26

4827 & 4827/3

4011/1 & 4011/13

65

4430/9_ _

47, 48, 49

4828 & 4828/3

1316/13_ _

22, 24

4015

1316/1_ _

22, 24

1340/1_ _

22, 24

1400LV/_ _

4 4

4831/1

63

4831/_ _ & 4831/3_ _

32

4832/1 & 4832/13

63

4832/19/_ _ & 4832/139/_ _

64

7

4450/6_ _

27

4832/3_ _

35

4450/7_ _

26

4832/3_ _/9

7

4450/9_ _

47, 48, 49

4015/3

7

4451

47, 48

4015/31

7

4460

47, 48, 60

35, 42

4016

7

4460/6_ _

1400W/_ _

35, 42

4016/3

7

1410/1*

22, 24

4017

7

1512/13_ _

23, 25

4017/1

7

4460/_ _

1512/1_ _

23, 25

4018

7

4461

1522/13_ _

23, 25

4020/3BG & 4021/3BG

54

4461/ELT

1522/1_ _

23, 25

4070

14

4469

1630W/_ _

42

4075

9

4469/9_ _

1832/13_ _

22, 24

4077

15

1832/1_ _

22, 24

4096/2WB

1837/13_ _

22, 24

4096/B & 4096/P

22, 24 26, 27, 28

47 47, 48

27

23, 25

1901 – 1904

47, 48

4581/BG - 4583/BG

1096/1_ _

1837/1_ _

NUMERICAL INDEX

List No

6

224/030

134

Page No

4832/_ _ 4832/_ _/9

32, 40 32 32, 40 32

4836/1

63

27

4836/_ _

32

4460/7_ _

26

4837/1 & 4837/13

63

4460/9_ _

47, 49

4837/19/_ _ & 4837/139/_ _

64

48 47, 48, 60

4837/3_ _

32, 40

4837/3_ _/9

32

4837/_ _

32

47, 48

4837/_ _/9

32

47, 49

4841/3BG

53

4480

48

4841/3_ _

33

14

4489

47, 48, 60

4841/BG

53

14

4489/9_ _

47, 49

4841/_ _

33

4097/B & 4097/P

15

4490

47, 48

4842/3BG

53

4130 & 4132

14

4490/9_ _

47, 48, 49

4842/3_ _

33

48

1906

26, 27

4170 - 4176

14

4491

47, 48

4842/BG

53

1908

26, 27

4177 - 4180

15

4492

47, 48

4842/_ _

33

2141

15

4190 & 4192

14

4493

47, 48

4846/BG

53

2147

15

4211/BLANK

8

4494

47, 48, 60

4846/_ _

33

2161

11

4214/3BG

53

4499

47, 48

4847/3BG

53

2163

11

4214/3_ _ & 4214/3_ _/9

33

4500 & 4500/_ _

9

4847/3_ _

33

2167

11

4214/BG

53

4506 & 4507

2190

14

4214/_ _ & 4214/_ _/9

33

4512/1 & 4512/13

2240/1

64

4216/3BG

53

2240/BG

54

4216/3_ _ & 4216/3_ _/9

33

2250W/_ _

35, 42

8

4847/BG

53

65

4847/_ _

33

4512/3BG

54

5001 & 5001/CVR

75

4512/3_ _

34, 41

5002 & 5002/_

75

4216/BG

53

4512/BG

54

2272/1

64

4216/_ _ & 4216/_ _/9

33

4512/_ _

34, 41

2272/BG

54

4250W/_ _

5006

75 75, 77

4513/BG & 4514/BG

55

5

4304 & 4304/_ _

4

4513/WH – 4515/WH

9

2340/_ _

34

4306 & 4306/_ _

4

4515/_ _

2372/_ _

34, 40

4307 & 4307/3

4

4520/1 & 4520/31

8

5010/2 – 5010/4

77

63

4521/1 & 4521/31

8

5011 – 5013

75

64

4522/1 & 4522/13

64

5014

4522/3_ _

37

5015

75

8

5016

75, 77

2330

2382

5

4314/1 & 4314/13

35, 42

5003 – 5005

36

5006/2 – 5006/4

77

5007 – 5009

75

5010

75, 77

2400

11, 15

4314/139/_ _ & 4314/19/_ _

2400/E

11, 15

4314/3_ _

2400W/_ _

35, 42

4314/3_ _/9 & 4314/_ _/9

2402

11, 15

4314/_ _

47, 48

5017 & 5017/_

75

2411/_ _

37, 42

4316/1 & 4316/13

63

4530/6_ _

27

5018 & 5018/_

75

3250W/_ _

35, 42

4316/139/_ _ & 4316/19/_ _

64

4530/7_ _

26

5019 & 5019/_

75

32, 40

4530/9_ _

47, 49

3401 & 3402

18

4316/3_ _

3410

17

4316/3_ _/9 & 4316/_ _/9

3412

17

4316/_ _

32, 40 32 32, 40

32 32, 40

4523 & 4523/3 4530

4535 4535/6_ _

47, 48, 60 27

75, 77

5020/3 – 5020/5

77

5020/7

77

5021/3 – 5021/5

77

WIRING ACCESSORIES List No

Page No

Page No

List No

Page No

5021/7

77

6586/BG

46, 51

7501/2

73

8520/_ _ & 8520/3_ _

25

5022/3 – 5022/5

77

6588/BG

46, 51

7501/_ _

23

8532/_ _ & 8532/3_ _

25

5022/7

77

6589/BG

46, 51

7502/_ _

23

8533/_ _ & 8533/3_ _

24

5170

15

6591/_ _

47, 50

7503/_ _

23

8545/_ _ & 8545/3_ _

25

5172 & 5713

15

6592/_ _

47, 50

7504/_ _ & 7504/3_ _

22

8546/_ _ & 8546/3_ _

25

5175

15

6758/WH

46

7505

73

8560/_ _

24

5177

15

6852

19

7505/_ _

22

8578/_ _ & 8579/_ _

24

5430/_ _

28, 49

6878

19

7506/_ _ & 7506/3_ _

22

8711/_ _ – 8714/_ _

26

5550/_ _

28, 49

6880

19

7507/_ _

23, 72

8716/_ _ & 8718/_ _

26

5552/_ _

28, 49

6900

18

7508/_ _ & 7508/3_ _

5571 –5574

46, 50

6900/1 & 6900/1RD

18

7509/_ _

5801

16

6900/2 & 6900/2RD

18

7510/_ _

22

9201/BG

5850

16

6901 – 6904

7511/_ _ – 7514/_ _

27

9201/PBG

5851

16

6906

47, 49

7515/_ _

22

9203/BG

5855 & 5855/_ _ _

16

6915

71, 73

7516/_ _

27

9203/PBG

5856

16

6920/_ _

6

7518/_ _

27

9206/BG

5860 & 5861

16

6925

6

7520/_ _ _

23

9206/PBG

6017/_ _

36

6940

47, 48

7532/_ _ & 7532/3_ _

23

9209/18BG

6096/1

List No

43, 46, 49

22 23, 72

List No

8832/_ _ & 8832/3_ _

29

8T01/_ _ – 8T04/_ _

28

65

6999

19

7533/_ _ & 7533/3_ _

22

9209/18PBG

6096/_ _

35, 41

7011

6

7545/_ _ & 7545/3_ _

23

9209/24BG

6125/_ _

35, 42

7011/_ _ _

29

6141/_ _

35, 42

7044

6142/_ _

35, 42

7046 – 7048

6151/_ _

35, 42

7060

6152/_ _

35, 42

7061 7062 & 7062/E

6170/1 6170/_ _ 6172/1 6172/_ _ 6173/1 6173/_ _ 6175/1 6175/_ _ 6551/_ _ – 6554/_ _

65

46 46, 51 46 46, 51 46 47, 51 47 47, 51

7546/_ _ & 7546/3_ _

23

9209/24PBG

7560/_ _

22

9209/BG

5

7578/_ _ & 7579/_ _

22

9209/PBG

7697

18

9341/GV

47, 51

5

7711/_ _ – 7714/_ _

26

9342/GV

47, 51

5

7716/_ _

26

9561

71

35, 41

7063

71

7718/_ _

26

9561/1L

47 46, 51 46

59 59, 60

65

7065

71

7832/_ _ & 7832/3_ _

29

9561/2L

60

35, 41

7067

71

7915

71

9561/DL

59, 60

65

7069

71

7T01/_ _ – 7T04/_ _

28

9561/E

35, 41

7071

71

8011/_ _ & 8011/3_ _

29

9561/ES

65

7074

71

8075/1

64

9561/L

61

35, 41

7080

71

8075/_ _

9562

59

51

71

8091/1

7081 & 7081/2

71

8091/_ _

6560/24_ _

47, 50

7086

71

8092/1

6560/_ _

46, 50

7087

71

8092/_ _

6561/1_ _

46, 50

7091

72

8094/1

6561/_ _

46, 50

7094

72

6562/1_ _

46, 50

7111

6

6562/_ _

46, 50

7161/_ _ & 7162/_ _

34

6563/_ _

46, 50

7170/_ _

29

6564/_ _

46, 50

7172 – 7174

71

6566/_ _

46, 50

7172/_ _ & 7173_ _

29

6568/_ _

46, 50

7176

6569/_ _

46, 50

6570/18_ _

47, 50

6570/24_ _

47, 50

7222/BK & 7222/WH

6570/_ _

46, 50

7250 /D1_ _ /D2_ _

6571/1_ _

46, 50

7255 & 7255/TE

43, 46, 50

7257 & 7257/TE

46, 50

34, 40 72

61 59, 60, 61

9562/E

61

36, 72

9562/ES

59

72

9562/ES

61

36, 72

9562/L

61

72

9563/E

59, 61

8094/_ _

36, 72

9563/L

61

8170/_ _

29

9564/E

59, 61

8172/_ _ & 8173/_ _

29

9565

8250/D1_ _ & 8250/D2_ _

25

9565/L

59, 60

8255/1

63

9566/E

61

8255/_ _

32

9567

71

8257/1

63

9567/L

7211

6

8257/_ _

32

9569/L

59, 60

7221 & 7221/3

6

8265/1 – 8268/1

65

9570/2

59, 61

6

8265/_ _ – 8268/_ _

9571 & 9572

58, 59

23

8283/1 & 8284/1

4

8283/_ _ & 8284/_ _

36, 42 65 36, 43

9573/L & 9573/RL 9579

59

59 59, 60

60 58, 59

4

8314/_ _

29

9581/RG & 9582/RG

7259

63

8316/_ _

29

9591/L – 9593/L

60 60

6572/_ _

43, 46, 50

7265 – 7271

73

8400/D1_ _ & 8400/D2_ _

25

9599

59

6573/_ _

43, 46, 50

7283

73

8501/_ _ – 8503/_ _

25

9660 & 9660/_

58

6574/_ _

43, 46, 50

7284

73

8504/_ _ & 8504/3_ _

24

9664

58

6575/_ _

36, 43

7286

73

8505/_ _

24

9668

58

6576/_ _

46, 50

7288

73

8506/_ _ & 8506/3_ _

24

9685/BG

53

6577/_ _

36, 43

7305

73

8507/_ _

25, 72

9685/_ _

33

6578/_ _

46, 50

7314/_ _ & 7316/_ _

29

8508/_ _ & 8508/3_ _

24

9687/BG

53

6579/_ _

46, 50

7318

73

8509/_ _

25, 72

9687/_ _

33

6580/18BG & 6580/24BG

47, 51

7324

73

8510/_ _

24

TNS/1/BK – TNS/3/BK

18

6580/BG

46, 51

7348

73

8511/_ _ – 8514/_ _

27

6581/_ _ _ & 6582/_ _ _

46, 51

7400/D1_ _ & 7400/D2_ _

23

8515/_ _

24

6583/BG

46, 51

7410RD & 7410WH

18

8516/_ _

27

6584/BG

46, 51

7501 – 7503

73

8518/_ _

27

NUMERICAL INDEX

7080/LH

47, 50

6572/1_ _

46, 51

5

6560/18_ _

6571/_ _

Page No

135

INSTALLATION BOXES

PVC TRUNKING

List No

List No

4005 4006 9040 – 9044 9047 – 9050 9052 – 9054 9211/_ _ _ 9214/_ _ _ 9215/BG 9221/_ _ _ 9223/_ _ _ 9224/BG 9406 LPU1 LPU2 LPU2TA LPUD1 LPUD2 LPUD2TA

Page No 67 67 67 67 67 68 68 68 68 68 68 67 68 68 68 68 68 68

NUMERICAL INDEX

SERVICE ITEMS

136

List No 1250 3467 3711 3713 3767 4674 6509 6900 6900/1RD 6900/1WH 6900/2 6900/2RD 6913 6988 6989 7410/RD 7410/WH 7695 7697 15244 15485-2/L/4 100215 705094/* 705094/*/VR 706097 735006/ZP 735007/ZP 735008/* 735009/*/VR 735010* 735010/*/VR 735011* 735011/*/VR 735012* 735013* 735023 735032 735033 735038

Page No 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69

CIRCUIT PROTECTION Page No

BCL/ACR 80, 81, 82, 84 BCL/ACS 80 BCL/ADPL 80 BCL/ASS 80 BCL/BB05 87 BCL/BB1 86, 87 BCL/BB3 86, 87 BCL/BBCA 87 BCL/BBCB 87 BCL/BBMC 87 BCL/BBO5 86 BCL/BBSB 87 BCL/BBSL 87 BCL/BBSR 87 BCL/BE 80 BCL/MC 80 BCL/RCD 80 BCL/SCR 80 BCL/SCS 80 BCL/SGB 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 87 BCL/SQCR 80, 82, 83, 85 BCL/SSS 80 BCL/TGB 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 87 BCL1 80, 81 BCL1/ 80, 81 BCL1/EB 80, 81 BCL1/FAD 80, 81 BCL1/FTD 80, 81 BCL1/IB 80, 81 BCL1/SEL 80, 81 BCL2 80, 81 BCL2 / 82 BCL2 /FAD 82 BCL2 /FTD 82 BCL2/ 80 BCL2/EB 80, 82 BCL2/FAD 80 BCL2/FAU 80, 82 BCL2/FTD 80 BCL2/FTU 80, 82 BCL2/IB 80, 82 BCL2/SEL 80, 82 BCL2/SER 80, 82 BCL3 80, 83 BCL3/ 80, 83 BCL3/EB 80, 83 BCL3/FAD 80, 83 BCL3/FTD 80, 83 BCL3/IB 80, 83 BCL3/SEL 80, 83 BCL4 80, 84 BCL4/ 80, 84 BCL4/EB 80, 84 BCL4/FAD 80, 84 BCL4/FAU 80, 84 BCL4/FTD 80, 84 BCL4/FTU 80, 84 BCL4/IB 80, 84 BCL4/SEL 80, 84 BCL4/SER 80, 84 BCL5 80, 85 BCL5/ 80, 85 BCL5/EB 80, 85 BCL5/FAD 80, 85 BCL5/FAU 80, 85 BCL5/FTD 80, 85 BCL5/FTU 80, 85 BCL5/IB 80, 85 BCL5/SEL 80, 85 BCL5/SER 80, 85 BCLBBTB 87

100/_ _ _ 216/A010 221/_ _ _ _ 223/_ _ _ _ 224/_ _ _ _ 226/_ _ _ _ 228/_ _ _ _ 241/_ _ _ _ _ 243/030 244/_ _ _ _ 246/_ _ _ _ 301/_ _ 302/_ _ _ 303/_ _ _ _ 310/_ _ _ _ _ 325/_ _ _ _ 340/_ _ _ _ 363/_ _ _ _ _ 380/_ _ _ _ _ 40/MI2 402/_ _ _ 404/0A 404/_ _ _ _ 405/232 406/OA 407/_ _ _ _ 408/_ _ _ _ _ _ 409/242124 409/OA 410/_ _ _ _ 410/_ _ _ _B 411/_ _ _ 412/OA 413/2 413/23624 413/25626 413/26786 413/2B 413/313 413/383 414/_ _ _ _ _ _ 415/_ _ _ _ 415/_ _ _ _B 415/OA 416/_ _ _ _ 418/_ _ _ 420/OA 4404/_ _ _ 4406/_ _ _ 4414/_ _ _ _ 4416/_ _ _ _ 4424/_ _ _ _ _ 4426/_ _ _ _ _ 443 61/_ _ _ _ _ _ 6106/_ _ _ 6110/_ _ _ 6116/_ _ _ 6120/_ _ _ 6132/_ _ _ 6140/_ _ _ 63/MI2 741 744/_ _ 748 799 802/_ _ _ 804/0A 804/_ _ _ _ 805/232 806/OA 807/_ _ _ _ 807/_ _ _ _F 808/_ _ _ _ _ 809/242124 809/O_ _ 810/_ _ _ _ 810/_ _ _ _B

91 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 100 100 100 91 91 91 91 91 91 94 90 94 95 90 94 95 95 90 94 99 95 90 94 95 95 95 99 94 94 95 94 99 90 95 94 90 102 102 102 102 102 102 100 91 103 103 103 103 103 103 91 100 104 100 100 96 90 96 97 90 96 99 97 97 90 96 99

811/_ _ _ 812/OA 812/OAF 813/2 813/23624 813/23824 813/25626 813/25826 813/26786 813/28786 813/2B 813/2F 813/313 813/383 813/383F 814/272126 814/282125 815/_ _ _ _ 815/O_ _ 816/_ _ _ _ 817/_ _ _ _ _ 818/_ _ _ 820/283 820/O_ _ 823/_ _ _ _ _ 824/2A 826/283 830/2A 833/_ _ _ _ _ 836/283 840/2A 844/4 910/_ _ _ _ 913/_ _ _ 915/_ _ 920/OW/435 943W CBE/_ _ CBE3/_ _ CBE4/_ _ CHHSLA11 CHHSLA20 CIK22-_ _ CIK24-_ _ CIK40-_ _ CIK63-_ _ EN100 MCBLD ME/FB

97 90 90 96 97 97 97 97 97 97 99 99 96 96 99 97 97 96 90 97 98 96 98 90 98 90 98 90 98 98 90 104 98 98 90 90 100 104 104 104 100 100 100 100 100 100 104 100 104

CONDITIONS OF SALE OF GOODS HOME 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETION In these and Conditions the following expressions shall have the following meanings unless inconsistent with the context: “Business Day” any day other than a Saturday or Sunday or a public or bank holiday in England “Contract” any contract between Electrium and the Customer for the sale and purchase of the Goods formed in accordance with clause 2 “Contract ” The and conditions governing the Contract which are set out below “Customer” The person(s), firm or company whose order for the Goods is accepted by Electrium “Electrium” Electrium Sales Limited (Company Number 2226729) whose ed office is at Lichfield Road, Brownhills, West Midlands WS8 6JZ. “Force Majeure” any cause preventing Electrium from performing any or all of its obligations which arises from or is attributable to acts, events, omissions or accidents beyond the reasonable contemplation and control of Electrium including, without limitation, strikes, lockouts or other industrial disputes (whether involving the work force of Electrium or otherwise), protest, act of God, war, or national emergency, an act of terrorism, riot, civil commotion, malicious damage, compliance with any law or governmental order, rule, regulation or direction, accident, breakdown of plant or machinery, fire, explosion, flood, storm, epidemic or default of suppliers or subcontractors, restraints or delays affecting shipping or carriers “Goods” any goods which Electrium supplies to the Customer (including any of them or any part of them) under a Contract “Intellectual Property Rights” all intellectual and industrial property rights including patents, know-how, ed trade marks, ed designs, utility models, applications for and rights to apply for any of the foregoing, uned design rights, uned trade marks, rights to prevent ing off for unfair competition and copyright, database rights, topography rights and any other rights in any invention, discovery or process, in each case in the United Kingdom and all other countries in the world and together with all renewals and extensions “ and Conditions” the standard and conditions of sale set out in this document together with any special agreed in writing between the Customer and Electrium. The headings in these and Conditions are for convenience only and shall not affect their construction or interpretation. 2 FORMATION AND INCORPORATION 2.1 Subject to any variation under clause 2.6, the Contract will be upon these and Conditions to the exclusion of all other and conditions and all previous oral or written representations, including any or conditions which the Customer purports to apply under any purchase order, confirmation of order or similar document, whether or not such document is referred to in the Contract. Each order or acceptance of a quotation for Goods will be deemed to be an offer by the Customer to purchase Goods upon these and Conditions. The Contract is formed when the order is accepted by Electrium, by way of a written acknowledgement of order. No contract will come into existence until a written acknowledgement of the order is issued by Electrium. Any quotation is valid for a period of 30 days only from its date, provided Electrium has not previously withdrawn it. The Customer must ensure that the of its order and any applicable specification are complete and accurate. Acceptance of delivery of the Goods will be deemed conclusive evidence of the Customer’s acceptance of these and Conditions. Save as set out in the Contract, these and Conditions may only be varied or amended in writing and signed by a director of Electrium. Any quotation is valid for a period of 30 days from the date thereof provided that Electrium has not previously withdrawn the quotation. 3 PRICE 3.1 The price for the Goods is exclusive of VAT or any successor tax thereto unless otherwise agreed in writing. 3.2 The price for the Goods shall be (unless otherwise agreed by Electrium in writing) the list price of Electrium current at the date of despatch and in the case of an order for delivery by instalments the price payable for each instalment shall be Electrium’s list price current at the date of despatch for each instalment. All prices are based on standard pack sizes and quantities and Electrium reserves the right to levy an additional charge if such packs must be broken up to fulfil an order. 3.3 The price for the Goods is inclusive of costs of carriage to the Customer’s premises in Great Britain and Northern Ireland except on individual orders having a net value calculated by reference to the Company’s most recent price list of less than £200 (excluding VAT) which shall be subject to an additional charge of not less than £15.00 (excluding VAT) to cover carriage and packing. 3.4 The price for the Goods is based on the costs of materials, labour, sub-contracts, transport, taxes, duties and currency exchange rates ruling at the date of the quotation. 3.5 Electrium reserves the right to amend the Contract price to take of any variations in these costs or the imposition of any new taxes or duties resulting from whatever cause before delivery of the Goods. 3.6 Electrium will be entitled to increase the price of the Goods following any changes in the specification made both at the request of the Customer and agreed by Electrium or to cover any extra expense as a result of the Customer’s instructions or lack of instructions, or to comply with the requirements referred to in clause 9. 3.7 If the cost to Electrium of performing its obligations under the Contract shall be increased or reduced by reason of the making or amendment after the date of its quotation of any law or of any other order, regulation or bye-law having the force of law that shall affect the performance of Electrium’s contractual obligations, the amount of such increase or reduction shall be added to or deducted from the Contract price as the case may be. 4 PAYMENT 4.1 Electrium may invoice the Customer for the Goods on or at any time after delivery and subject to clause 3.4, payment is due in pounds sterling on the last day of the month following the month of dispatch of the Goods. Payment made before the payment is due under this clause shall be subject to a settlement discount of 2.5%. VAT is calculated on the discounted value of the invoice and is not subject to settlement discount. 4.2 Time for payment will be of the essence. 4.3 No payment will be deemed to have been received until Electrium has received cleared funds. 4.4 Notwithstanding any Contract Term allowing the Customer credit, all sums payable to Electrium under the Contract will become due immediately upon termination of the Contract. 4.5 All payments to be made by the Customer under the Contract will be made in full without any set-off, restriction or condition and without any deduction or withholding for or on of any counterclaim or any present or future taxes, levies, duties, charges, fees, deductions or withholdings of any nature, unless the Customer is required by law to make any such deduction or withholding. 4.6 Electrium may appropriate any payment made by the Customer to Electrium to such of the invoices for the Goods as Electrium thinks fit, despite any purported appropriation by the Customer. 4.7 If any sum payable under the Contract is not paid when due then, without prejudice to Electrium’s other rights under the Contract, that sum will bear interest from the date of invoice until payment is made in full, both before and after any judgment, at the rate of 3% per annum over The Royal Bank of Scotland plc base rate from time to time, such interest to accrue daily and be calculated on a daily basis. Electrium will be entitled to suspend deliveries of the Goods until the outstanding amount has been received by Electrium from the Customer. 5 PACKING MATERIALS 5.1 Packing cases and cartons will be provided free of charge by Electrium. 5.2 All pallets used shall remain at all times the property of Electrium and are to be returned to Electrium (at Electrium’s cost) on demand in good condition. 5.3 Electrium reserves the right to alter the method of packing without reference to the Customer. 6 DAMAGE OR LOSS IN TRANSIT 6.1 Electrium will not be liable in respect of any damage or discrepancy, shortage or loss in transit or any claim that the Goods delivered do not otherwise comply with the Contract unless the Customer shall have informed Electrium in writing or facsimile as follows: (a) within three days of delivery in the event of any damage, discrepancy or shortage; (b) within seven days of delivery in the event that the Goods do not comply with the Contract; and (c) within twenty-one days of receipt of the Electrium’s invoice in the event of non-delivery. 6.2 Where the Goods are accepted from the Electrium’s carriers they shall be deemed to have been checked by the Purchaser and accepted unless the delivery receipt is signed and endorsed ‘unexamined’ and the packing and its contents are retained for later inspection. 7 DELIVERY 7.1 The place of delivery for Goods shall be the Customer’s premises or as otherwise agreed by Electrium in writing. 7.2 The time of delivery will be as agreed between the parties or if no such agreement has been reached will be within a reasonable time and the Company will be entitled to make delivery by instalments. Where the Customer requires delivery next day a charge of £13.50 will be made. 7.3 Electrium will use reasonable endeavours to deliver each of the Customer’s orders for the Goods within the time agreed in accordance with clause 7.2 above, but the time of delivery will not be of the essence. If, despite those endeavours, Electrium is unable for any reason to fulfil any delivery or performance on the specified date, Electrium will be deemed not to be in breach of this Contract, nor (for the avoidance of doubt) will Electrium have any liability to the Customer for direct, indirect or consequential loss (all three of which include, without limitation, pure economic loss, loss of profits, loss of business, depletion of goodwill and like loss) howsoever caused (including as a result of negligence) by any delay or failure in delivery except as set out in this condition. Any delay in delivery will not entitle the Customer to cancel the order unless such delay exceeds 90 days. If the Customer cancels the order in accordance with this Clause 7.3 then: 7.3.1 Electrium will refund to the Customer any sums which the Customer has paid to Electrium in respect of that order (or part of the order) which has been cancelled; and 7.3.2 the Customer will be under no liability to make any further payment under clause 4.1 in respect of that order (or part of the order) which has been cancelled. 8 RISK / OWNERSHIP 8.1 Risk of damage to or loss of the Goods will to the Customer on delivery. 8.2 Ownership of the Goods will not to the Customer until Electrium has received in full (in cash or cleared funds) all sums due to it in respect of: 8.2.1 the Goods; and 8.2.2 all other sums which are or which become due to Electrium from the Customer on any . 8.3 Until ownership of the Goods has ed to the Customer, the Customer must: 8.3.1 hold the Goods on a fiduciary basis as Electrium’s bailee ; 8.3.2 store the Goods (at no cost to Electrium) separately from all other Goods of the Customer or any third party in such way that they remain readily identifiable as Electrium’s property; 8.3.3 not destroy, deface or obscure any identifying mark or packing on or relating to the Goods; and 8.3.4 maintain the Goods in satisfactory condition insured on Electrium’s behalf for their full price again all risks to the reasonable satisfaction of Electrium, and will whenever requested by Electrium produce a copy of the policy of insurance. 8.4 The Customer may resell the Goods before ownership has ed to it solely on the following conditions: 8.4.1 any sale will be effected in the ordinary course of the Customer’s business at full market value and the Customer will to Electrium accordingly; and 8.4.2 any such sale will be a sale of Electrium’s property on the Customer’s own behalf and the Customer will deal as principal when making such a sale. 8.5 The Customer’s right to possession of the Goods will terminate immediately if any of the circumstances set out in clause 13.1 occur. 8.6 Electrium will be entitled to recover payment for the Goods notwithstanding that title in any of the Goods has not ed from Electrium. 8.7 The Customer grants Electrium, its agents and employees an irrevocable licence at any time to enter any premises where the Goods are or may be stored in order to inspect them or, where the Customer’s right to possession has terminated, to recover them. 8.8 Where Electrium is unable to determine whether any Goods are the goods in respect of which the Customer’s right to possession has terminated, the Customer will be deemed to have sold all goods of the kind sold by Electrium to the Customer in the order in which they were invoiced to the Customer. 8.9 On termination of the Contract, however caused, Electrium’s (but not the Customer’s) rights contained in this clause 8 will remain in effect. 9 THE GOODS 9.1 All samples, drawings, descriptive matter, specifications and advertising issued by Electrium (or the manufacturer of the Goods) and any descriptions or illustrations contained in Electrium’s (or the manufacturer’s) catalogues or brochures are issued or published for the sole purpose of giving an approximate idea of the Goods represented by or described in them. They will not form part of the Contract and this is not a sale by sample. 9.2 Electrium may make any changes to the specification, design, material or finishes of the Goods which: 9.2.1 are required to conform with any applicable safety or other statutory (or regulatory) requirements; or 9.2.2 do not materially affect their quality or performance.

l l

10 WARRANTY, EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY AND INDEMNITY Warranty 10.1 Electrium will, free of charge, within a period of 12 months from the date of delivery of the Goods which are proved to the reasonable satisfaction of Electrium to be damaged or defective due to defects in material, workmanship or design (other than a design made, furnished or specified by the Customer), repair, or at its option, replace such Goods. This obligation will not apply where: 10.1.1 the Goods have been improperly altered in any way whatsoever, or have been subject to misuse or unauthorised repair, or refinished or dismantled; 10.1.2 the Goods have been improperly installed or connected; 10.1.3 any maintenance requirements relating to the Goods have not been complied with; 10.1.4 any instructions as to storage of the Goods have not been complied with in all respects; or 10.1.5 the Customer has failed to notify Electrium of any defect or suspected within 14 days of delivery where the defect should be apparent on reasonable inspection, or within 14 days of the same coming to the knowledge of the Customer where the defect is not one which should be apparent on reasonable inspection, and in any event no later than 12 months from the date of delivery. 10.2 Electrium will refund to the Customer the cost of carriage on the return of any such defective or damaged Goods, and will deliver any repaired or replacement Goods to the Customer at Electrium’s own expense. 10.3 Any Goods which have been replaced will belong to Electrium. Any repaired or replacement Goods will be liable to repair or replacement under the specified in clause 9.1 for the unexpired portion of the 12 month period from the original date of delivery of the replaced Goods. Exclusion of Liability 10.4 In the event of any breach of Electrium’s express obligations under clauses 7.3, 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 above the remedies of the Customer will be limited to damages. 10.5 Electrium does not exclude its liability (if any) to the Customer: 10.5.1 for breach of Electrium’s obligations arising under section 12 Sale of Goods Act 1979 or section 2 Sale and Supply of Goods and Services Act 1982; 10.5.2 for personal injury or death resulting from Electrium’s negligence; 10.5.3 under section 2(3) Consumer Protection Act 1987; 10.5.4 for any matter which it would be illegal for Electrium to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability; or 10.5.5 for fraud. 10.6 Except as provided in clauses 7.3 and 10.1 to 10.5, Electrium will be under no liability to the Customer whatsoever (whether in contract, tort (including negligence), breach of statutory duty, restitution or otherwise) for any injury, death, damage or direct, indirect or consequential loss (all three of which include, without limitation, pure economic loss, loss of profits, loss of business, depletion of goodwill and like loss) howsoever caused arising out of or in connection with: 10.6.1 any of the Goods, or the manufacture or sale or supply, or failure or delay in supply of the Goods by Electrium or on the part of Electrium’s employees, agents or sub-contractors; 10.6.2 any breach by Electrium of any of the express or implied of the Contract; 10.6.3 any use made or resale by the Customer of any of the Goods, or of any product incorporating any of the Goods; 10.6.4 any statement made or not made, or advice given or not given, by or on behalf of Electrium or otherwise under the Contract. 10.7 Except as set out in clauses 7.3 and 10.1 to 10.5, Electrium hereby excludes to the fullest extent permissible in law, all conditions, warranties and stipulations, express (other than those set out in the Contract) or implied, statutory, customary or otherwise which, but for such exclusion, would or might subsist in favour of the Customer. 10.8 Each of Electrium’s employees, agents and sub-contractors may rely upon and enforce the exclusions and restrictions of liability in clauses 7.3 and 10.4 to 10.7 in that person’s own name and for that person’s own benefit, as if the words “its employees, agents and subcontractors” followed the word Electrium wherever it appears in those clauses save each reference in clause 10.6.1. 10.9 The Buyer acknowledges that the above provisions of this Condition 10 are reasonable and reflected in the price which would be higher without those provisions, and the Customer will accept such risk and/or insure accordingly. Indemnity 10.10 The Customer agrees to indemnify, keep indemnified and hold harmless Electrium from and against all costs (including the costs of enforcement), expenses, liabilities (including any tax liability), injuries, direct, indirect or consequential loss (all three of which include, without limitation, pure economic loss, loss of profits, loss of business, depletion of goodwill and like loss), damages, claims, demands, pro ceedings or legal costs (on a full indemnity basis) and judgments which Electrium incurs or suffers as a consequence of a direct or indirect breach or negligent performance or failure in performance by the Customer of the of the Contract. 11 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 11.1 The Customer warrants that any design or instruction issued or given by the Customer shall not be such as will cause Electrium to infringe any Intellectual Property Rights in the execution of the Customer’s order and the Customer agrees to indemnify and keep Electrium indemnified against all liability in the event that such warrant is found to be untrue, misleading or breached. 11.2 No right or licence is granted to the Customer in respect of Electrium’s Intellectual Property Rights, except the right to use, or re-sell the Goods in the Customer’s ordinary course of business. 11.3 The Customer shall not without Electrium’s prior consent allow any trade marks of Electrium or other words or marks applied to the Goods to be obliterated, obscured or omitted nor add any additional marks or words. 12 SAFETY 12.1 The Customer shall ensure that any modifications whatsoever made to the Goods supplied hereunder comply with the requirements of any applicable safety regulations. 12.2 The Customer shall ensure that any kits supplied hereunder are so assembled as to ensure that the assembled product is safe and complies with the requirements of any applicable safety regulations. 12.3 Without prejudice to the above provisions, where Electrium provides the Customer with information about the use for which Goods are designed and have been tested and about any conditions to ensure that when put to that use they would be safe and without risk to health, the Customer shall use the Goods accordingly and comply with the said conditions. To be properly used the Goods shall be selected, installed, commissioned and maintained in accordance with good engineering practice and under the supervision of suitably qualified personnel. 13 TERMINATION 13.1 If the Customer cancels, extends or delays or purports to cancel, extend or delay the Contract or part thereof, or fails to take delivery of any Goods at the time agreed (if any) or if no time is agreed within a reasonable time, then the Customer will be liable (without prejudice to any other rights of Electrium to claim damages) to indemnify and keep indemnified Electrium against any resulting loss, damage or expense incurred by Electrium in connection with the supply or non-supply of the Goods including the cost of any material, used or intended to be used therefor and the cost of labour and other overheads including a percentage in respect of profit. 13.2 Electrium may by notice in writing served on the Customer terminate the Contract forthwith if the Customer: 13.2.1 is in material breach of any of the of the Contract and, where the breach is capable of remedy, the Customer fails to remedy such breach within 14 days service of a written notice from Electrium, specifying the breach and requiring it to be remedied. Failure to pay any sums due in accordance with clause 3.1 is a material breach of the of the Contract which is not capable of remedy; 13.2.2 becomes bankrupt, insolvent, makes any composition with his creditors, has a receiver appointed under the Mental Health Act 1983 or dies; 13.2.3 has any distraint, execution or other process levied or enforced on any of its property; 13.2.4 ceases to trade or appears in the reasonable opinion of the Company likely or is threatening to cease to trade within 4 weeks; or 13.2.5 the equivalent of any of the above occurs to the Buyer under the jurisdiction to which the Buyer is subject; or the Company reasonably anticipates that one of the above set of circumstances is about to occur. 13.3 The termination of the howsoever arising is without prejudice to the rights, duties and liabilities of either the Customer or Electrium. 13.4 Electrium will be entitled to suspend any deliveries otherwise due to occur following service of a notice specifying a breach under clause 13.2.1, until either the breach is remedied or the Contract terminates, whichever occurs first. 14 FORCE MAJEURE 14.1 Electrium will be deemed not to be in breach of the Contract or otherwise liable to the Customer in any manner whatsoever for any failure or delay in performing its obligations under the Contract due to Force Majeure, provided that it has and continues to comply with its obligations set out in clause 14.2. 14.2 If Electrium’s performance of its obligations under the Contract is affected by Force Majeure, Electrium may cancel the Contract by notice in writing to the Customer so far as it relates to Goods not supplied or work not done at the date of the Force Majeure and such cancellation shall not give rise to any claims by the Customer. The Customer shall remain liable to pay for the Goods delivered prior to the date of such cancellation. 15 GENERAL 15.1 Time for performance of all obligations of the Customer under the Contract is of the essence. 15.2 Time for performance of all obligations of Electrium under the Contract is not of the essence. 15.3 Each right or remedy of Electrium under any Contract is without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Electrium under this or any other Contract. 15.4 If any condition or part of the Contract is found by any court, tribunal, istrative body or authority of competent jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable then that provision will, to the extent required, be severed from the Contract and will be ineffective without, as far as is possible, modifying any other provision or part of the Contract and this will not affect any other provisions of the Contract which will remain in full force and effect. 15.5 No failure or delay by Electrium to exercise any right, power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same, or of some other right, power or remedy. 15.6 Save as set out in clause 10.8, the parties to the Contract do not intend that any of its will be enforceable by virtue of the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 by any person not a party to it. 15.7 Electrium may assign, delegate, license, hold on trust or sub-contract all or any part of its rights or obligations under the Contract. 15.8 The formation, existence, construction, performance, validity and all aspects whatsoever of the Contract or of any term of the Contract will be governed by English law. The English Courts will have non-exclusive jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in connection with the Contract. The parties agree to submit to that jurisdiction. 16 EXPORT 16.1 All Contract set out above apply to overseas transactions (i.e. sales outside the United Kingdom) where appropriate and except as set out in this clause 16. 16.2 The price of Goods includes the cost of packing for shipment FOB (Inco 2000) to a British port or FCA (Inco 2000) to a British airport except that orders having a net value of £500 and below shall be subject to an additional charge to cover packing and carriage. No allowance will be made in lieu of transportation if the Customer accepts delivery at the factory, container depot or at any other inland destination or provides his own transportation or where packing of a lesser standard is required. The provisions of this clause 16.2 apply to overseas transactions in place of the corresponding provisions of clause 3.3. 16.3 First orders from overseas Customers should be accompanied by bank references to enable payment to be agreed. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, payment is due on delivery. Goods shall be deemed to have been delivered when the invoice has been presented in the United Kingdom accompanied by the appropriate documents of title. The provisions of this clause 16.3 apply to overseas transactions in place of the provisions of clause 4.1. 16.4 The Goods will be sold free on board to a British port or airport and Electrium will be under no obligation to give the Customer notice as specified in Section 32(3) of the Sale of Goods Act 1979. CIF (Inco 2000) or cost and freight arrangements can be made if requested by the Customer, at cost and Electrium will, on receipt of the Customer’s indemnity, take all reasonable steps to recover from the underwriters any loss or damage for which they may be liable. 16.5 The Customer shall be solely responsible for complying with all legislation and regulations governing the importation of the Goods into the country of destination including import and export licences and the payment of duties thereon including but not limited to customs duties and VAT. CONDITIONS OF USE All products supplied by Electrium should be installed by suitably qualified personnel in accordance with the requirements of relevant legislation, regulations (including the IEE Wiring Regulations) and the accepted practice in the industry. Any further information which may be required about the use for which any specific product has been designed and tested, or about conditions of use, is available on request. In pursuance of Electrium’s policy of continuing product improvement, equipment described in this publication is subject to change without notification.

ELECTRIUM SALES LIMITED Lichfield Road Brownhills West Midlands WS8 6JZ England. eMail: [email protected] DUBAI OFFICE Telephone: +971 4 2666403 Facsimile: +971 4 2668031 DUBLIN OFFICE Telephone: +353 1 8208047 Facsimile: +353 1 8208107 Although every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in the compilation of the technical detail within this publication, specifications and performance data are constantly changing. Latest details can be obtained from Crabtree.

Publication No. AB 1980 09/03 Printed in England.